Mercedes - CLS 350 - Owners Manual - 2007 - 2007

Disclaimer All of the für following PDF document for this sich vehicle model Daslanguage folgende versions PDF-Dokument dieses Fahrzeugmodell bezieht in allen relate solely toversion vehicles intended for sale on the German which Sprachversionen nur aufofdie die für den deutschen Marktand bestimmt The following theFahrzeuge, Owner‘s Manual describes allmarket models, series and correspond to German regulations. sind undequipment die den deutschen Vorschriften entsprechen. Bitte wenden Sie sich an special of your vehicle. Country-specific language variations are Ihren autorisierten Mercedes-Benz Servicestützpunkt, um equipped ein gedrucktes possible. Please note that your vehicle might not be withExemplar all the Please contact your authorised Mercedes-Benz Service Centreand to obtain für andere Fahrzeugmodelle und affects Fahrzeugmodelljahre zu erhalten. described functions. This also safety-relevant systems functions. a printed version forauthorised other vehicle models and vehicle model years. Thislike PDF Please contact your Mercedes-Benz dealership if you would document the latest version. Possible variations to your vehicle mayzu not Dieses PDF-Dokument stellt die Manual aktuelle Version dar. Mögliche Abweichungen to receive aisprinted Owner‘s for other vehicle models and vehicle be taken into account askönnten Mercedes-Benz constantlysein, updates their vehicles to Ihrem konkreten Fahrzeug nicht berücksichtigt da Mercedes-Benz model years. the state of the art and introduces changes design andanpasst, equipment. seine Fahrzeuge ständig dem neuesten Standinder Technik sowiePlease therefore that this PDF is document in no way replaces the version Änderungen in Form und Ausstattung vornimmt. Bitte beachten Sie daher, dass The onlinenote Owner‘s Manual the current and valid version. Itprinted is possible that which was affecting deliveredyour with yourFall vehicle. dieses PDF-Dokument in keinem das gedruckte ersetzt, mit deviations specific vehicle could Exemplar not be taken intodas account dem Fahrzeug ausgeliefert wurde. as Mercedes-Benz constantly adapts its vehicles according to the latest technology and makes changes to the form and the equipment. Please also read the printed Owner‘s Manual, supplementary documents and the digital Owner‘s Manual in the vehicle. Copyright All rights reserved. All texts, images and graphics are subject to copyright and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be copied or changed for any commercial use or for the purpose of being passed on nor used on other webistes. Internal use only 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, Thank you for choosing Mercedes-Benz. Before you drive off, familiarise yourself with your vehicle and read the Owner's Manual. This will help you to obtain the maximum pleasure from your vehicle and to avoid endangering yourself and others. Items of optional equipment are marked with an asterisk *. The equipment in your vehicle may vary, depending on the model, the ordered items, the country specifications and availability. The illustrations in this Owner's Manual show a left-hand-drive vehicle. The arrangement of the switches, levers, stowage compartments, etc. will differ accordingly in a right-handdrive vehicle. Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its vehicles to the state of the art and therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in design, equipment and technical features at any time. You cannot, therefore, base any claims on the data, illustrations or descriptions in this Owner's Manual. Please consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre if you have any questions. The Owner’s Manual, Brief Instructions, service booklet and supplements related to vehicle equipment belong with the vehicle. You should always keep them in the vehicle 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 1 and pass them on to the new owner if you sell the vehicle. The technical documentation team at Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant motoring. i You can get to know the important features of your vehicle in German and in English in the interactive Owner's Manual on the Internet at: www.mercedes-benz.de/betriebsanleitung 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, Contents Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Practical advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 2 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 2 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 3 Index 1, 2, 3 ... 7G–TRONIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 A ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) . . . . . 57 Display message . . . . . . . . . . 221, 231 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Acceleration Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Accident Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Active Service System see ASSYST PLUS ADAPTIVE BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Adaptive brake lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Adaptive damping system see ADS ADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Airbag Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Driver's . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Sidebags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Windowbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Air cleaner Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioning 2-zone Thermatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-zone Thermotronic . . . . . . . . . . . Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activating/deactivating auxiliary heating/ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . Air-recirculation mode with convenience opening/closing feature . Auxiliary heating/ventilation . . . . . Controlling automatically . . . . . . . . Cooling with air dehumidification . . Demisting the windscreen . . . . . . . Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . Misted up windows . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear window heating . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the air distribution . . . . . . . Setting the airflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the temperature . . . . . . . . . Setting the temperature (rear compartment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see Climate control Air-conditioning Activating/deactivating . . . . . . . . . Airmatic DC (Dual Control) . . . . . . . . Air pump, electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 153 155 164 165 165 166 159 158 163 242 164 158 164 162 163 160 159 160 158 146 217 Ambient lighting Setting (on-board computer) . . . . . 126 Antifreeze concentration . . . . . . . . . 317 Anti-lock braking system see ABS Anti-theft alarm system see ATA Anti-theft systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 ASSYST PLUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 ATA (anti-theft alarm system) . . . . . . 61 Switching off the alarm . . . . . . . . . . 61 Audible warning signal . . . . . . . . . . . 251 AUTO lights Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Automatic transmission Changing gear yourself . . . . . . . . . 105 Display in the speedometer . . . . . . 105 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Emergency running mode . . . . . . . 257 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 One-touch gearshifting . . . . . . . . . 105 Program selector button . . . . . . . . 106 Releasing the parking lock manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . 104 Shift ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 3 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 4 Index Auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . 166, 264 Adjusting (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Auxiliary ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Axle load, maximum permissible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 B BAS (Brake Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Battery Changing (auxiliary heating remote control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Changing (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Changing (KEYLESS GO key) . . . . . 270 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Checking (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Checking (KEYLESS GO key) . . . . . 270 Check lamp (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Check lamp (KEYLESS GO key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 270 Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Maintenance (vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . 288 Reconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Removing/fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Voltage (on-board computer) . . . . . 116 4 Belt force limiters Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Belt height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Belt tensioners Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Belt warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Bonnet Bonnet catch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Bonnet release lever Release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Boot Emergency release . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Locking separately . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Opening/closing (automatically) . . . 72 Opening/closing (manually) . . . . . . . 70 Boot lid Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Brake Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Brake Assist see BAS Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Brake lamps Adaptive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Brake system Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Bulb Dipped-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . 273 Licence plate lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Main-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . 273 Parking lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273, 274 Side lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Turn signal lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 see Lamp Bulbs Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 C Calling up a malfunction see Message memory menu Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High-pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . Parktronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plastic trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CD player/CD changer Operating (on-board computer) . . . 210 211 213 212 211 214 212 212 212 119 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 5 Index Central locking Automatic locking (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 KEYLESS GO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 69 Central locking/unlocking button . . . 70 Central unlocking Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 KEYLESS GO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 69 Centre console Lower section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Upper section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Changing a wheel see Flat tyre Child-proof locks Rear doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Side windows (rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Children in the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Restraint systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Child seat Automatic recognition . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Automatic recognition (malfunction) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Suitable positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Cockpit Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Collapsible wheel Pumping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Storage location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 COMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Constant headlamp mode Setting (on-board computer) . . . . . 125 Consumption statistics (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Convenience closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Checking the level . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Display message . . . . . . . . . . 229, 232 Mixture ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 D Dashboard see Cockpit Date Setting (on-board computer) . . . . . 124 Daytime driving lights see Constant headlamp mode Delayed switch-off Exterior lighting (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Interior lighting (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Diesel Low outside temperatures . . . . . . . 193 Diesel engine Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Digital speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Dipped-beam headlamps Automatic headlamp mode* . . . . . . 92 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Symmetrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Service display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Symbol messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Text messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Up (AMG menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Distance warning function . . . . . . . . 138 Distance warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Cleaning the sensors . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Distance warning function . . . . . . . 138 Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 5 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 6 Index Door Automatic locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Emergency locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Opening (from the inside) . . . . . . . . 69 Door control panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Drinks holder see Cup holder Driver's airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Driver's door Unlocking (KEYLESS GO) . . . . . . . . . 69 Driver's seat position . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Driving safety system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 ADAPTIVE BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Adaptive brake lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 58 BAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 EBV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 ESP® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Driving system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Airmatic DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 HOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Parktronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 6 Driving tip Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . 208 Driving on wet roads . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 DVD audio Operation (on-board computer) . . . 119 DVD video Operation (on-board computer) . . . 120 Dynamic driving seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Select Seat adjustment (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 E Easy-entry/exit feature Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Easy-entry feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Easy-exit feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 EBV (electronic brake-power distribution) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Electrical/electronic equipment Retrofitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Electronic brake-power distribution see EBV Electronic Stability Program see ESP® e mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency key element Lost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency locking Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency running mode Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . Emergency unlocking Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Running irregularly . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting with KEYLESS GO . . . . . . . Starting with the key . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine diagnostic warning lamp . . . Engine electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the oil level (dipstick) . . . Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filler neck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 261 267 257 267 266 237 256 255 102 101 302 247 299 255 301 314 195 195 237 195 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 7 Index Temperature display (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) . 59 Activating/deactivating . . . . . . . . . . 59 Display message . . . . . . . . . . 222, 231 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 244 Exterior lighting Delayed switch-off (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Exterior mirror parking position Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 87 Exterior mirrors Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) . . . . . 85 Folding in/out (automatically) . . . . . 84 Folding in/out (electrically) . . . . . . . 84 Folding in when locking (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Parking position . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 87 Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Storing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Exterior view Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 F Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 First-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Flat tyre MOExtended run-flat system . . . . . 287 Preparing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 276 TIREFIT kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Floormat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Foglamps Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Fording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Frequencies Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Front-passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . 312, 313 Fuel filler flap Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Fuel line Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Fuel tank Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Range (on-board computer) . . . . . . 130 Fuse allocation chart . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Fuse box Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 G Garage door Opening/closing (with the remote control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clearing the memory . . . . . . . . . . . Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programming the remote control . . Gear indicator (on-board computer) Gearshift program Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts . . . . . Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gross vehicle weight, maximum permissible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 186 187 319 186 116 108 298 177 310 H Headlamp Misting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Headlamp mode (automatic) . . . . . . . 92 Headlamps Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Cleaning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Headlamps delayed switch-off see Exterior lighting delayed switch-off 7 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 8 Index Head restraint Adjusting (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 77 Adjusting (rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Luxury . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 77 NECK-PRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Resetting triggered head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Heating see Air conditioning High-pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . 211 HOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 I Immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Indicator and warning lamp Brakes (red) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Distronic (red) . . . . . . . . . . . . 138, 245 Engine diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 ESP® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 244 LIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF . . . . 51, 242 Reserve fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 248 Tyre pressure monitor . . . . . . . . . . 248 Indicator and warning lamps . . . . . . 244 8 Indicator lamp see Indicator and warning lamp Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Selecting the language (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Ambient (on-board computer) . . . . 126 Automatic control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Delayed switch-off (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Manual control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Reading lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Interior motion sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 ISOFIX child seat securing system . . 55 J Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 217 291 291 K Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Checking the battery . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Convenience closing . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Factory setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 67 Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Modifying the programming . . . . . . . 66 KEYLESS GO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Checking the battery . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Closing the boot lid automatically . . 73 Convenience closing . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Losing the key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Modifying the programming . . . . . . . 68 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Key positions Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 KEYLESS GO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Kickdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107, 109 L Lamps see Indicator and warning lamp Language Selecting (on-board computer) . . . 123 Licence plate lighting Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Lighting see Lights 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 9 Index Lights Constant headlamp mode . . . . . . . . 92 Cornering light function . . . . . . . . . . 95 Dipped-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . 92 Front foglamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Hazard warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Headlamp flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Headlamp range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Main-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Rear foglamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Switching off (display message) . . . 235 Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 LIM indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Load compartment load, maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Loading guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Locking Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Emergency locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 From the inside (central locking button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Luggage net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Luxury head restraint . . . . . . . . . . 76, 77 M Main-beam headlamps Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Main fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Maintenance Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Malfunction memory see Message memory menu Manual gearshift program . . . . . . . . 108 Massage function (PULSE) . . . . . . . . . 80 Maximum speed Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Memory card Operation (on-board computer) . . . 119 Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Menu DISTRONIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Menu (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . 114 AMG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Message memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Resetting to factory settings . . . . . 121 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Standard display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Submenu overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Message see Message memory menu Minispare emergency spare wheel Storage location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Mirror Sun visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Own number sending . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Run-on time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Telephone menu (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Modifying the programming Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 KEYLESS GO key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 MOExtended run-flat system* . 199, 287 MP3 Operation (on-board computer) . . . 119 Multi-contour seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Multi-function display . . . . . . . . 110, 112 Multi-function steering wheel . . . . . 111 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 9 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 10 Index N Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Navigation menu (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 NECK-PRO head restraint . . . . . . . . . . 49 Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 O Oil topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AMG menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convenience submenu . . . . . . . . . . Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DVD menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dynamic driving seat submenu . . . Factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heater submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument cluster submenu . . . . . Lighting submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . Message memory menu . . . . . . . . . Navigation menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard display menu . . . . . . . . . Telephone menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time/Date submenu . . . . . . . . . . . Trip computer menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 195 111 116 118 123 219 120 129 121 123 122 122 121 120 121 115 130 122 129 TV menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Vehicle submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 One-touch gearshifting . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Operating system see On-board computer Outside temperature Display (on-board computer) . 111, 116 Overhead control panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Own number sending (mobile phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 P Paint code number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Parktronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Parking lamps Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Parking lock Releasing manually (automatic transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Parking position Exterior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Parktronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Activating/deactivating . . . . . . . . . 150 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Range of the sensors . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Warning display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 242 Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Permanent Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . 144 Petrol Minimum grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Plastic trim Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Power windows see Side window PRE-SAFE® system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 PRE-SAFE® System Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Preventive occupant safety system see PRE-SAFE® Program selector button Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . 106 Pulling away . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 R RACETIMER (on-board computer) . . 117 Radio Changing a station (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 see separate operating instructions Rain closing feature (sliding/tilting sunroof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 11 Index Rain sensor Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Range (on-board computer) . . . . . . . 130 R button see Reset button Rear foglamp Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Rear-view mirror Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Anti-dazzle (manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) . . . . . 85 Rear window Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Rear window blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Rear window heating Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . 242 Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Remote control Auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Changing the batteries (auxiliary heating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Programming (garage door opener) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Replacing the wiper blades . . . . . . . 275 Reserve Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Reserve fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Restraint system Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Restraint systems For children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Retaining hooks (boot) . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Reverse gear Engaging (automatic transmission) 105 Reversing lamp Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Roller sunblind Rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Roof load, maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Run-on time (mobile phone) . . . . . . . 184 S Seat Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75, 77 Correct driver's seat position . . . . . . 90 Storing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Seat belt Adjusting the height . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Fastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 249 Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Seat ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . 241 Selector lever Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Service Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Service display see ASSYST PLUS Service indicator see ASSYST PLUS Service products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Windscreen washer fluid . . . . . . . . 317 Settings Calling up a stored setting . . . . . . . . 87 Factory (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 67 Factory (KEYLESS GO) . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Factory (on-board computer) . . . . . 121 Shift ranges Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . 106 Display in the speedometer . . . . . . 105 Sidebags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Side window Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 11 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 12 Index Side windows Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Skibag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . Rain closing feature . . . . . . . . . . . . Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sliding sunroof see Sliding/tilting sunroof Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Socket Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spare wheel Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speed Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speed limiter Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speedometer Digital speedometer (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the unit (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Permanent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 212 174 169 171 171 205 182 182 282 217 308 303 142 116 110 123 142 227 144 142 SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Standard display (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Selecting the display . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Station see Radio Status line (on-board computer) . . . 112 Selecting the display . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Steering wheel Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 82 Buttons (on-board computer) . . . . . 111 Storing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Steering wheel gearshift paddles . . 107 Steering wheel heating . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . 242 Stowage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Armrest (in front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Armrest (under) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Centre console (rear) . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Driver's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Rear seat armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Ventilating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Stowage compartments Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Stowage space Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Submenu (on-board computer) . . . . 122 Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Dynamic driving seat . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Time/Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Summer opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Sun visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Supplemental Restraint System see SRS Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Surround lighting Switching on/off (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Switching off the alarm ATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 T Tail lamps Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 311 303 302 305 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 13 Index Vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Vehicle weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Telephone see Mobile phone Temperature Engine oil (on-board computer) . . . 116 Outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Thermatic Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . 242 Thermotronic Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . 242 Third brake lamp Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Time Lap time (on-board computer) . . . . 117 Setting (on-board computer) . . . . . 124 Setting the time (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Timer (on-board computer) . . . . . . . 117 TIREFIT kit Storage location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Total distance recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 29 Resetting the trip meter . . . . . . . . . 110 Tow-away protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Towing eye Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Transmission output (maximum) Telephone/two-way radio . . . . . . . 299 Transport (vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Trip computer Menu (on-board computer) . . . . . . 129 Trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Turn signal lamps Display message . . . . . . . . . . 233, 234 TV Operation (on-board computer) . . . 119 Two-way radio Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Tyre grip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Calling up (on-board computer) . . 202 Display message . . . . . . . . . . 224, 237 Tyre pressure loss warning system 201 Tyre pressure monitor Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Tyre pressures Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Tyres Direction of rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Tyre tread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 U Unit for distance Setting (on-board computer) . . . . . 123 Unladen weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Unlocking Emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . 266 From the inside (central unlocking button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Up (display message) . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 V Variable Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Vehicle Emergency unlocking . . . . . . . 266, 267 Individual settings (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Leaving parked up . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Vehicle electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Vehicle identification plates . . . . . . 300 Vehicle level Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Setting (AIRMATIC DC) . . . . . . . . . 146 Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Vehicle weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 13 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 14 Index W Warning and indicator lamp ABS (yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Warning signal Audible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Washer fluid Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Wearing seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Wheel bolts Tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Wheels General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Windowbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Windows Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Cleaning the windscreen . . . . . . . . 211 Side windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Windscreen Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Windscreen washer fluid . . . . . . . . . 317 Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Windscreen washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197, 317 Windscreen washer reservoir Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Windscreen washer system . . . . . . . 317 14 Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Replacing the wiper blades . . . . . . 275 Winter diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204, 205 Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Limiting the speed (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 15 Introduction Protection of the environment Protection of the environment RKeep H Environmental note RRemove Daimler's declared policy is one of integrated environmental protection. The objectives are for the natural resources which form the basis of our existence on this planet to be used sparingly and in a manner which takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into account. You too can help to protect the environment by operating your vehicle in an environmentally-responsible manner. Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, transmission, brake and tyre wear depend on the following factors: ROperating conditions of your vehicle RYour personal driving style You can influence both factors. You should bear the following in mind: Operating conditions RAvoid short trips as these increase fuel consumption. RMake sure that the tyre pressures are always correct. RDo an eye on the vehicle's fuel consumption. roof racks once you no longer need them. RA regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. You should therefore adhere to the service intervals. RAlways have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Personal driving style RDo not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. RDo not warm up the engine with the vehi- cle stationary. RDrive carefully and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. RAvoid frequent, sudden acceleration. RChange gear in good time and use each gear only up to 2/3 of its maximum engine speed. Returning used vehicles Mercedes-Benz will take back your Mercedes-Benz to dispose of it in an environmentally-responsible manner, in accordance with the European Union (EU) End of Life Vehicles Directive. The End of Life Vehicles Directive applies to vehicles of up to 3.5 t gross vehicle weight, in accordance with national regulations. For several years, Mercedes-Benz has been meeting all the legal requirements for a design which allows for recycling and re-use. There is a network of return points and disassembly plants which can recycle your vehicle in an environmentally-responsible manner. The options for recycling vehicles and parts are constantly being developed and improved. This means that your MercedesBenz will also continue to meet even the increased recycling quotas in the future in good time. You can obtain further information from your national Mercedes-Benz homepage or your national hotline number. RSwitch off the engine in stationary traffic. not carry any unnecessary weight. 15 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 16 Introduction Operating safety Operating safety Safety notes G Risk of accident and injury All work on the vehicle and, in particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The specialist workshop must have the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. G Risk of accident and injury Some safety systems only function when the engine is running. You should therefore never switch off the engine when driving. Otherwise the safety systems of your vehicle may no longer protect you and other persons as intended. In addition, there is the danger that you may lose control of your vehicle and thus cause an accident. G Risk of accident and injury Work carried out incorrectly, or alterations made to the vehicle, e.g. rerouting of cables under coverings, could cause the safety systems of your vehicle to stop working 16 properly. The safety systems would thus no longer protect you and other persons as intended. In addition, there is the danger that you may lose control of your vehicle and thus cause an accident. All work and alterations to the vehicle, e.g. installations or modifications, should therefore be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident A heavy impact to the underbody, tyres or wheels, for example when bottoming out on rough terrain or driving over an obstacle at high speed, could damage your vehicle. As a result, you could cause an accident. This also applies to vehicles which are equipped with underbody protection. For this reason, drive slowly over obstacles, avoid bottoming out the vehicle in rough terrain and, if necessary, have your vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident If work on electronic equipment and its software is carried out incorrectly, this equipment could stop working. The electronic systems are networked via interfaces. Tampering with these electronic sys- tems could cause malfunctions in systems which have not been modified. Malfunctions such as these can seriously jeopardise the vehicle's operating safety and therefore your own safety. You should thus have all work and modifications to electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicle registration Mercedes-Benz may ask its Service Centres to carry out technical inspections on certain vehicles to improve their quality or safety. If you did not purchase your vehicle from an authorised specialist dealer and your vehicle has never been inspected at a MercedesBenz Service Centre, it is possible that your vehicle is not registered in your name with Mercedes-Benz. Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehicle checks if it has your registration data. It is advisable to register your vehicle with a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible about any change in address or vehicle ownership. 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 17 Introduction Operating safety Correct use Observe the following information when using your vehicle: RThe safety notes in this manual RThe “Technical data” section in this manual RNational road traffic regulations RNational road traffic licensing regulations G Risk of injury Various warning stickers are affixed to your vehicle. Their purpose is to draw your attention, and the attention of others, to various dangers. Therefore, do not remove any warning stickers unless the sticker clearly states that you may do so. If you remove the warning stickers, you or others could be injured by failing to recognise certain dangers. 17 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 18 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 18 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 19 At a glance Exterior view ....................................... Cockpit ................................................. Instrument cluster .............................. Multi-function steering wheel ............ Centre console .................................... Overhead control panel ...................... Door control panel .............................. Stowage compartments ..................... 20 22 26 30 32 36 37 38 19 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, At a glance Exterior view Exterior view 20 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 20 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 21 At a glance Exterior view Function 1 Page Boot Opening and closing Vehicle tool kit 217 Vehicle battery 288 2 Rear lights 271 3 Rear window heating 164 4 Fuel filler flap 190 Fuel requirements 191 Opening and closing the doors 163 Cleaning the windows 212 7 Sliding/tilting sunroof* 169 8 Exterior mirrors 84 Parking aid* 85 * optional Cleaning the wiper blades 211 Replacing the wiper blades 275 Opening the bonnet 193 Engine oil 195 Coolant 196 b Front lights 271 c Fitting the front towing eye 293 d Tyres and wheels 198 Checking the tyre pressure 200 Flat tyre, fitting the spare wheel 276 Fitting the rear towing eye 293 a 66 Demisting the windscreen 6 97 70 217 Page Windscreen wipers, operation 9 Spare wheel 5 Function e 21 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, At a glance Cockpit Cockpit Left-hand-drive vehicles 22 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 22 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 23 At a glance Cockpit Function 1 2 Page Combination switch with: 8 • Main-beam headlamps 94 • Turn signals 94 • Windscreen wipers 97 Cruise control lever for: • Cruise control 132 • Distronic* 135 • Speedtronic 142 Multi-function steering wheel 30 4 Instrument cluster 26 5 Horn 6 Linguatronic lever* – see separate operating instructions 3 7 Parktronic* warning display * optional Function Page Controls Thermatic or 4zone Thermotronic* 153 Switches the rear window heating on/off 164 g 9 Overhead control panel a Glove compartment b Controls COMAND APS* and the audio system, see the respective operating instructions c Centre console 32 d Ignition lock 74 e Adjusts the steering wheel manually 82 Adjusts the steering wheel electrically* 81 Switches the steering wheel heating* on/off 82 f Function 36 177 Adjusts the headlamp range Page 95 h Parking brake 104 j Opens the bonnet 193 k Releases the parking brake 104 l Light switch 91 m Door control panel 37 149 23 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, At a glance Cockpit Right-hand-drive vehicles 24 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 24 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 25 At a glance Cockpit Function 1 Glove compartment 2 Overhead control panel 3 Controls Thermatic or 4zone Thermotronic* 4 5 6 Page 177 153 164 Parktronic* warning display 149 Combination switch with: • Main-beam headlamps 94 • Turn signals 94 • Windscreen wipers 97 Cruise control lever for: • Cruise control 132 • Distronic* 135 • Speedtronic 142 Page Multi-function steering wheel 30 8 Instrument cluster 26 9 Horn a Linguatronic lever* – see separate operating instructions 7 36 Switches the rear window heating on/off * optional Function Function j b Door control panel 37 c Light switch 91 d Adjusts the headlamp range 95 e Opens the bonnet 193 f Releases the parking brake 104 g Ignition lock 74 h Adjusts the steering wheel manually 82 Page Adjusts the steering wheel electrically* 81 Switches the steering wheel heating* on/off 82 k Parking brake 104 l Centre console 32 m Controls COMAND APS* and the audio system, see the respective operating instructions 25 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, At a glance Instrument cluster Instrument cluster Kilometres 26 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 26 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 27 At a glance Instrument cluster Function 1 1 2 Turn signal indicator lamp, left Page Function Dipped-beam indicator lamp 92 e Multi-function display 112 f Trip meter 110 g Depending on the setting in the on-board computer: 124 d 94 2 ESP® warning lamp 3 Segments 4 Distance warning lamp*1 245 5 Turn signal indicator lamp, right 94 • Outside temperature2 • Digital speedometer 244 Page Function Tyre pressure warning lamp* 248 p Brake system warning lamp 245 q Clock 125 r Reserve fuel warning lamp 250 s Fuel gauge t Reset button 110 u Diesel engine: preglow indicator lamp 102 o 6 SRS warning lamp 248 7 ABS warning lamp 244 h Standard display 115 8 Seat belt warning lamp 249 j Gearshift program display 104 9 Coolant temperature gauge 110 k Total distance recorder a Coolant warning lamp 246 l Selector lever indicator b Rev counter 111 m Speedometer c Main-beam indicator lamp 94 n Engine diagnostic warning lamp Page 105 247 On vehicles without Distronic*, the symbol lights up briefly but has no function. Vehicles for the United Kingdom: the speed in km/h is always shown instead of the outside temperature. * optional 27 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, At a glance Instrument cluster Miles 28 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 28 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 29 At a glance Instrument cluster Function 1 3 4 Turn signal indicator lamp, left Page Function Dipped-beam indicator lamp 92 e Multi-function display 112 f Trip meter 110 g Depending on the setting in the on-board computer: 124 d 94 2 ESP® warning lamp 3 Segments 4 Distance warning lamp*3 245 5 Turn signal indicator lamp, right 94 • Outside temperature4 • Digital speedometer 244 Page Function Tyre pressure warning lamp* 248 p Brake system warning lamp 245 q Clock 125 r Reserve fuel warning lamp 250 s Fuel gauge t Reset button 110 u Diesel engine: preglow indicator lamp 102 o 6 SRS warning lamp 248 7 ABS warning lamp 244 h Standard display 115 8 Seat belt warning lamp 249 j Gearshift program display 104 9 Coolant temperature gauge 110 k Total distance recorder a Coolant warning lamp 246 l Selector lever indicator b Rev counter 111 m Speedometer c Main-beam indicator lamp 94 n Engine diagnostic warning lamp Page 105 247 On vehicles without Distronic*, the symbol lights up briefly but has no function. Vehicles for the United Kingdom: the speed in km/h is always shown instead of the outside temperature. * optional 29 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 30 At a glance Multi-function steering wheel Multi-function steering wheel Function 1 Multi-function display 2 s Accepts or rejects/ t ends a call* æ • Selects submenus - in the Settings menu • Adjusts the values • Adjusts the volume 3 30 è Selecting menus: ÿ scrolls back and forth Page 112 Function Page j Press briefly to k scroll back and forth in a menu. In the Audio/TV*/ DVD* menu: selects a stored station, an audio track or a video scene*. In the Telephone* menu: switches to the phone book and selects a name or phone number. j Press and hold in the Audio/TV*/ DVD* menu: selects the next/ previous station or selects an audio track or a video scene* using rapid scrolling. Press and hold in the Telephone* menu: starts rapid scrolling * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 31 At a glance Multi-function steering wheel Function Page k through the telephone book. 31 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 32 At a glance Centre console Centre console Lower section Function 1 Opens/closes the stowage compartment 177 Opens/closes the ashtray 181 2 KEYLESS GO* button 3 Selector lever 104 4 Switches the auxiliary heating*/ventilation* on/off 166 5 Deactivates Parktronic* 150 6 Sets AIRMATIC DC* 147 7 Sets the vehicle level* 146 8 Distronic*: sets the specified distance 138 Distronic*: switches the distance warning function on/off 138 Selects the gearshift program 106 9 a 32 Page 74 * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 33 33 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, At a glance Centre console Upper section 34 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 34 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 35 At a glance Centre console Function 1 2 3 4 Rolls the rear window blind* up/down 180 Folds back the rear seat head restraints 79 Switches the hazard warning lamps on/off 94 6 Unlocks the vehicle 70 7 ATA indicator lamp* 61 8 Deactivates/activates ESP® 59 Switches the seat heating* on the right-hand side on/ off 80 Page Switches the seat ventilation* on the right-hand side on/off 80 b Locks the vehicle 70 c Opening button CD changer*– see the the separate operating instructions d Switches the seat ventilation* on the left-hand side on/off a 51 9 Function 80 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp 5 5 5 Switches the seat heating* on the left-hand side on/off Page 80 The warning lamp lights up briefly when the key is turned to position 2 in the ignition lock, even on vehicles which do not have automatic child seat recognition* on the front-passenger seat. In that case it has no function and does not indicate that the front-passenger seat is equipped with automatic child seat recognition*. * optional 35 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 36 At a glance Overhead control panel Overhead control panel Function 1 2 3 4 96 ¡ Switches the automatic interior lighting on/ off 96 ð Switches the front interior lighting on/off 96 Opens/closes the sliding/ tilting sunroof* 62 X Switches the righthand reading lamp on/off 96 7 Rear-view mirror 83 8 Reading lamp 96 9 Transmitter buttons for garage door opener* 6 a Primes/deactivates towaway protection* Function Page b Interior light 96 c X Switches the lefthand reading lamp on/off 96 Ambient light 96 d 169 Primes/deactivates the interior motion sensor* 5 36 ò Switches the rear interior lighting on/off Page 186 62 * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 37 At a glance Door control panel Door control panel Function 1 Opens the door 69 2 Adjusts the seat electrically* 75 Stores settings for the seat, exterior mirrors and steering wheel* 86 4 Adjusts the exterior mirrors 84 5 Opens/closes the side windows 98 Unlocks the boot lid 71 Remote boot lid closing feature*: automatically opens or closes the boot lid 73 3 6 * optional Page 37 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, At a glance Stowage compartments Stowage compartments 38 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 38 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 39 At a glance Stowage compartments Function 1 Glove compartment 2 Front-passenger seat stowage compartment with firstaid kit 3 Door stowage pocket 4 Ruffled pocket 5 Ashtray* 6 Door stowage pocket 7 Side stowage space in the boot Page 177 216 181 217 9 Hooks at the top of the boot 176 a Door stowage pocket b Ashtray* c Ruffled pocket d Door stowage pocket * optional e f g Stowage well under the boot floor 8 Function 181 h j k Driver's seat stowage compartment with fire extinguisher* Page Function Page 179 Front stowage compartment in the centre console in the rear 178 Retaining clip on the sun visor 180 Cup holder* in the rear centre console 173 Front-passenger footwell luggage net 176 Rear stowage compartment in the centre console in the rear 179 Cup holder in the rear seat armrest 172 Stowage compartment in the rear seat armrest 179 l Stowage compartment in the lower section of the centre console 177 Ashtray* 181 Cigarette lighter* 181 Stowage compartment in front of the armrest 178 Cup holder* in the centre console 172 Stowage compartment/ telephone compartment under the armrest 178 m n o 39 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 40 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 40 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 41 Safety Occupant safety .................................. 42 Driving safety systems ....................... 57 Anti-theft systems .............................. 61 41 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 42 Safety Occupant safety Occupant safety Seat belts, together with belt tensioners, belt force limiters and airbags, are coordinated restraint systems. They reduce the risk of injury in defined accident situations and thereby increase occupant safety. However, seat belts and airbags generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. To ensure that the restraint systems can deliver their full potential protection, you should ensure that: Rthe seat and head restraint are adjusted properly (Y page 75) Rthe seat belt has been fastened properly (Y page 88) Rthe airbags can inflate properly if they are deployed (Y page 45) Rthe steering wheel is adjusted properly (Y page 81) Rthe restraint systems have not been modi- fied i An airbag increases the protection of vehicle occupants wearing a seat belt. However, airbags are only an additional restraint system which complements, but 42 does not replace, the seat belt. All vehicle occupants must wear their seat belt correctly at all times, even if the vehicle is equipped with airbags. This is because - on the one hand - airbags are not deployed in all types of accident, as in some situations airbag deployment would not increase the protection afforded to vehicle occupants, provided they are wearing their seat belt correctly. On the other hand, airbag deployment only provides increased protection if the seat belt is worn correctly because: Rthe seat belt helps to keep the vehicle occupant in the best position in relation to the airbag Rfor example, in a head-on collision, the seat belt can more adequately prevent the occupant from being propelled towards the force of the impact, and is thus better suited to prevent injury Therefore, in accident situations where an airbag is deployed, it only provides protection in addition to the seat belt if the seat belt is being worn correctly. G Risk of injury The restraint system may not work as intended if the following components have been modified or work on these components has not been performed correctly: Rrestraint system, consisting of the seat belts and anchorages, belt tensioners, belt force limiters, airbags Rwiring Rnetworked electronic systems Airbags or belt tensioners could then fail, e.g. in the event of an accident in which the deceleration force would normally be high enough to trigger the systems, or they could be triggered unintentionally. Never carry out any modifications on the restraint systems. Never tamper with electronic components and their software. G Risk of accident and injury Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 43 Safety Occupant safety In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If this work is not carried out correctly, the operating safety of your vehicle may be affected. There is a risk of an accident and injury. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) The SRS reduces the risk of occupants coming into contact with the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. It can also reduce the forces to which occupants are exposed during an accident. The SRS consists of: R1 warning lamp Rbelt tensioners Rbelt force limiters The 1 warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the engine is started. G Risk of injury If SRS is malfunctioning, individual systems may be activated unintentionally or not be triggered in the event of an accident with heavy braking. A malfunction has occurred if the 1 warning lamp: Rdoes not light up when you switch on the ignition Rdoes not go out after the engine has been running for a few seconds Rlights up again once the engine is running In this case, have SRS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. RAirbags 1 warning lamp The SRS functions are checked regularly when you turn on the ignition and when the engine is running. Malfunctions can therefore be detected in good time. Triggering of belt tensioners, belt force limiters and airbags In the event of a collision, the sensor in the airbag control unit evaluates important physical data such as duration, direction and force of the vehicle deceleration or acceleration. Based on the evaluation of this data and depending on the vehicle's rate of longitudinal deceleration in a collision, in the first stage the airbag control unit pre-emptively triggers the belt tensioners. i The front belt tensioners can only be triggered if the belt tongue is correctly engaged in the seat belt buckle. The front airbags are only deployed if there is an even higher rate of vehicle deceleration in a longitudinal direction. Vehicles fitted with adaptive, dual-stage front airbags: when the first deployment threshold is reached, the front airbag is filled with enough gas to reduce the risk of injuries. The front airbag is only fully inflated if a second threshold is reached within a few milliseconds due to the control unit having detected further deceleration. Criteria for triggering belt tensioners and airbags In the first stage of a collision, the airbag control unit evaluates the duration and direction of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in order to determine whether it is necessary to trigger the belt tensioner and/or airbag. The belt tensioner and airbag triggering thresholds are variable and are adapted to the rate of deceleration of the vehicle. This proc- 43 Z 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 44 Safety Occupant safety ess is pre-emptive in nature as the airbag must be deployed during – and not at the end of – the collision. i Airbags are not deployed in all types of accidents. They are controlled by complex sensor technology and evaluation logic. This process is pre-emptive in nature as airbag deployment must take place during the impact and must be adapted to provide calculated, additional protection for the vehicle occupants. Not all airbags are deployed in an accident. The different airbag systems work independently of each other. However, the deployment of each individual system will depend on the type of accident determined by the control system in the first stages of the collision (head-on collision, side impact and overturn) and the extent of the accident (in particular, the vehicle's rate of deceleration or acceleration). The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the direction of the force are basically determined by: Rthe distribution of forces during the collision Rthe 44 collision angle Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehi- cle Rthe characteristics of the object with which the vehicle has collided, e.g. the other vehicle Factors which can only be seen and measured after the collision has taken place do not play a decisive role in the deployment of an airbag, nor do they provide an indication of it. The vehicle may be deformed significantly, e. g. on the bonnet or the wing, without an airbag being deployed. This happens if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the necessary deceleration does not occur. Conversely, airbags may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformations. This is the case if, for example, very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal body members are affected and sufficient deceleration occurs as a result. Belt tensioners, belt force limiters The front seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear are equipped with belt tensioners. ! Do not engage the seat belt tongue in the buckle on the front-passenger seat if the seat is not occupied. Otherwise the belt tensioner could be activated in an emergency. If the seat belt is also equipped with a belt force limiter, the force exerted by the seat belt on the seat occupant is reduced. Belt tensioners tighten the seat belts in an accident, pulling them close against the body. i Belt tensioners do not correct incorrect seat positions or incorrectly fastened seat belts. Belt tensioners do not pull occupants back towards the backrest. The front belt force limiters are synchronised with the front airbags, which spread the forces exerted by the belt force limiters on the occupant over a greater area. When the ignition is switched on, the belt tensioner is triggered: Ronly if the restraint systems are operational (the 1 warning lamp lights up after the ignition is switched on and goes out once the engine is running)(Y page 43) Rfor each three-point seat belt in the front of the vehicle when the belt tongue is engaged in the buckle RIn the event of a head-on or rear-end collision if the vehicle decelerates or acceler- 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 45 Safety Occupant safety ates rapidly in a longitudinal direction during the initial stages of the collision RIn certain situations if the vehicle overturns, if the system determines that it can provide additional protection When the belt tensioners are triggered, you will hear a bang, which will not cause any harm to your hearing, and a small amount of powder may also be released. The 1 warning lamp lights up. G Risk of injury If the seat belt tensioners have been triggered, they provide no additional protection in the event of another accident. Therefore, have belt tensioners which have been triggered replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Comply with safety regulations when disposing of belt tensioners. Any MercedesBenz Service Centre can provide details of these regulations. Airbags Airbag deployment slows down and restricts the movement of the vehicle occupant. When the airbags are deployed, you will hear a bang, which will not cause any harm to your * optional hearing, and a small amount of powder may also be released. The 1 warning lamp lights up. The SRS/AIRBAG symbol indicates the location of the airbags. G Risk of injury Airbags provide additional protection; they are not, however, a substitute for the seat belts. Observe the following notes to reduce the risk of serious or even fatal injury if an airbag is deployed: RVehicle occupants — in particular pregnant woman — must wear their seat belt correctly at all times and lean back against their backrest, which should be positioned as close to the vertical as possible. The head restraint must support the back of the seat occupant's head at about eye level. RAlways secure children less than 1.50 m tall or under 12 years of age in suitable child restraint systems. RAll vehicle occupants must select a seat position that is as far away from the airbag as possible. The driver's seat position must allow the vehicle to be driven safely. The driver's chest should be as far away from the middle of the driver's front airbag cover as possible. RMove the front-passenger seat as far back as possible, in particular, if a child is secured in a child restraint system on the seat. RVehicle occupants – in particular, children – must not lean their head into the area of the window in which the sidebag/ windowbag is deployed. RRearward-facing child restraint systems must not be fitted to the front-passenger seat unless the front-passenger front airbag has been disabled. On the frontpassenger seat, the front-passenger front airbag is only deactivated if a child restraint system with automatic child seat recognition is fitted to the frontpassenger seat*. The 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp must be lit constantly. If either the rearward-facing child restraint system or the front-passenger seat* of your vehicle does not have automatic child seat recognition, children must be secured in a child restraint sys- 45 Z 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 46 Safety Occupant safety tem on a suitable seat in the rear. If you secure a forward-facing child restraint system to the front-passenger seat, you must move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. RMake sure there are no heavy or sharpedged objects in pockets of clothing. RDo not lean forwards, e.g. over the cover of the driver's front airbag, particularly when the vehicle is in motion. RDo not put your feet on the dashboard. ROnly hold the steering wheel by the rim. This allows the airbag to inflate fully. You could be injured if the airbag is deployed and you are holding the inside of the steering wheel. RDo not lean on the doors from inside the vehicle. RMake sure that there are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and the area of deployment of the airbag. RDo not place any objects between the seat backrest and the door. 46 RDo not hang any hard objects, for example coat hangers, on the grab handles or coat hooks. RDo not attach accessories, e.g. cup hold- ers, to the doors. It is not possible to rule out the risk of injuries caused by an airbag due to the high speed at which the airbag is required to deploy. G Risk of injury The airbag's functionality can only be guaranteed if the following parts are not covered and no badges or stickers are attached to them: RPadded steering wheel boss RFront-passenger ROuter RRear front airbag cover side of front seats door trims G Risk of injury When an airbag deploys, a small amount of powder is released. The powder may cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. In order to prevent possible breathing difficulties you should leave the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. You can also open the window to allow fresh air to enter the interior. The powder does not constitute a health hazard and does not indicate that there is a fire in the vehicle. G Risk of injury The airbag parts are hot after the airbag has been deployed. Do not touch them, otherwise you may burn yourself. Occupants are not protected by the airbags in the event of another accident. Have the airbags checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Front airbags The front airbags are designed to increase protection for the driver's and frontpassenger head and chest. 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 47 Safety Occupant safety The driver's front airbag and front-passenger front airbag are deployed: Rat the start of an accident with a high rate of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in a longitudinal direction Rif the system determines that airbag deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt Rif the seat belt is fastened Rindependently of other airbags in the vehi- cle Rif the vehicle overturns, but only if the system detects high vehicle deceleration in a longitudinal direction 1 Driver's front airbag 2 Front-passenger front airbag * optional Driver's front airbag 1 deploys in front of the steering wheel; front-passenger front airbag 2 deploys in front of and above the glove compartment. In vehicles with automatic child seat recognition in the front-passenger seat*, frontpassenger front airbag 2 is only deployed if the 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp in the centre console is not lit (Y page 51). This means that a child restraint system with automatic child seat recognition* has not been fitted to the frontpassenger seat or has been fitted incorrectly. Sidebags G Risk of injury If you wish to use seat covers, MercedesBenz recommends that, for safety reasons, you only use seat covers that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The seat covers must be equipped with a special tear seam for sidebags. Otherwise, a sidebag may not deploy correctly and could fail to provide the intended protection in the event of an accident. Appropriate seat covers can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The sidebags are intended to offer additional protection for the thorax when deployed. However, they do not protect the head, neck and arms. 1 Front sidebag 2 Rear sidebag* The sidebag inflates next to the backrest side cushions. Sidebags 1 and 2 are deployed: Ron the side on which an impact occurs Rat the start of an accident with a high rate of lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration, e.g. in a side impact Rindependently of the use of the seat belt Rindependently of the front airbags Z 47 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 48 Safety Occupant safety Rindependently of the belt tensioners Rif the vehicle overturns, but only if the system detects high vehicle deceleration in a lateral direction and determines that sidebag deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt Windowbags The purpose of the windowbags is to enhance the level of protection for the head (but not chest or arms) of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs. The windowbags are integrated into the side of the roof frame and run from the front door (A-pillar) to the rear door (C-pillar). Windowbags 1 are deployed: Rat the start of an accident with a high rate of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in a lateral direction Ron the side on which an impact occurs Rindependently If you are driving faster than approximately 30 km/h, PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures in the aforementioned situations: RIt with memory functions*: it adjusts the front-passenger seat if this is in an unfavourable position. of the front airbags Rregardless of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied the vehicle overturns and the system determines that windowbag deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt RIf the vehicle skids, it closes the sliding/ tilting sunroof* and side windows so that only a small gap remains. Rif PRE-SAFE® system PRE-SAFE® system takes pre-emptive measures to protect you in certain hazardous situations. PRE-SAFE® intervenes in the event of: Remergency braking situations, e.g. if BAS Brake Assist intervenes If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® releases the belt pretensioning. You can then reverse all settings made by PRE-SAFE® again. If the seat belts are not released: X Move the backrest or the seat back slightly until the belt tension is reduced. The locking mechanism releases. G Risk of injury Make sure when adjusting the seat that nobody can become trapped. Rcritical 1 Windowbag 48 situations involving driving dynamics, e.g. if the vehicle oversteers or understeers significantly due to physical limits being exceeded tensions the front seat belts. RVehicles ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats when adjusting the seats. You could otherwise damage the seats and the objects. * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 49 Safety Occupant safety NECK-PRO head restraint NECK-PRO head restraints are designed to increase protection to the driver's and frontpassenger's head and neck. To this end, the head restraints on the driver's and frontpassenger seats are moved forwards and upwards in the event of a rear-end collision in the direction of travel. This provides better head support. G Risk of injury Head restraint covers prevent the NECKPRO head restraints from triggering correctly. Consequently, the NECK-PRO head restraints cannot provide the intended level of protection. Do not use head restraint covers. If the NECK-PRO head restraints are triggered in an accident, you must reset the head restraints on the driver's and front-passenger seats (Y page 269). Head restraints that have been triggered are tilted forwards. Children in the vehicle If a child is riding in your vehicle, secure the child using a child restraint system appropriate to the size and age of the child and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Preferably, you should fit the restraint system on a suitable rear seat. Preferably, you should fit it to a suitable rear seat. Make sure that the child is strapped in throughout the trip. You can obtain information about the correct child restraint system from any MercedesBenz Service Centre. i It is advisable to use Mercedes-Benz care products to clean child restraint systems. You can obtain information about this from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G Risk of injury Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system. The children could injure themselves on parts of the vehicle. They could also be seriously or even fatally injured by prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold. Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight. The metallic parts of the child restraint system could heat up and the child could be burned by them. If the children open the door other persons could be injured. They could get out and injure themselves or be injured by a passing vehicle. You should also observe the information on HOLD; see the index. G Risk of injury An unsecured or incorrectly positioned load increases the risk of injury to the child in the event of: Ran accident Ra braking manoeuvre Ra sudden change of direction Do not carry heavy or hard objects inside the vehicle unless they are secured. You will find further information under "Loading guidelines" in the index. Child restraint systems Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use the child restraint systems listed on (Y page 54). 49 Z 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 50 Safety Occupant safety G Risk of injury To reduce the risk of serious or even fatal injury to the child in the event of a sudden change in direction, braking or an accident: RChildren less than 1.50 m tall and under twelve years of age must always be secured in special child restraint systems on a suitable vehicle seat. This is necessary because the seat belts are not designed for children of this size. RDo not secure children under twelve years of age on the front-passenger seat. Exception: the child is secured in a vehicle with automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat* and is secured in a child restraint system with automatic child seat recognition. RIf you fit a child restraint system to the front-passenger seat, you must move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. RNever allow children to travel sitting on the lap of another occupant. Due to the forces occurring in the event of an accident, heavy braking or during a sudden change in direction, it would not be possible to restrain the child. The child would 50 be thrown against parts of the vehicle interior and be seriously or even fatally injured. G Risk of injury If the child restraint system is not fitted correctly to a suitable vehicle seat, it cannot perform its protective function. The child cannot be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. This may lead to serious or even fatal injuries. For this reason, when fitting a child restraint system observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and correct use of the child restraint system. Child restraint systems should preferably be fitted to the rear seats. The child is generally better protected there. The entire base of the child restraint system must always be resting on the seat cushion. Never place objects, e.g. a cushion, under the child restraint system. Only use child restraint systems with their original covers. Only replace damaged covers with genuine Mercedes-Benz covers. For safety reasons, you should only use child restraint systems which have been approved for use in Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Child seat on the front-passenger seat Warning on the front-passenger sun visor Warning symbol for a rearward-facing child restraint system * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 51 Safety Occupant safety G Risk of injury If the front-passenger front airbag is not disabled: Ra child secured in a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat can be seriously and even fatally injured by the front-passenger airbag deploying. This is especially likely if the child is in the immediate vicinity of the front-passenger front airbag when it is deployed. Ra child must never be secured on the front-passenger seat in a rearward-facing child restraint system. Only secure a rearward-facing child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. Ralways move the front-passenger seat to the rearmost position if you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. The front-passenger front airbag is not disabled: Ron vehicles without automatic child seat recognition in the front-passenger seat* Ron vehicles with automatic child seat rec- ognition on the front-passenger seat* if 6 there is no child restraint system with automatic child seat recognition fitted to the front-passenger seat. Ron vehicles with automatic child seat rec- ognition on the front-passenger seat*, if the 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp is not lit. To draw attention to this danger, there is an appropriate warning sticker on the dashboard as well as on both sides of the sun visor on the front-passenger side. Information about recommended child restraint systems is available at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat* If your vehicle does not have automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat, this is indicated by a special sticker. The sticker is affixed to the side of the dashboard on the front-passenger side. It is visible when you open the front-passenger door. The warning lamp6 is located on the centre console. 1 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp The front-passenger seat sensor system for child restraint systems detects whether a special Mercedes-Benz child seat with automatic child seat recognition has been fitted. In such cases, the 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 1 lights up. The frontpassenger airbag is deactivated. G Risk of injury If the 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp does not light up when the child restraint system is fitted, the frontpassenger front airbag has not been disabled. If the front-passenger front airbag is Vehicles without automatic child seat recognition in the front-passenger seat: the warning lamp lights up briefly when you turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. However, it has no function and does not indicate that there is automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat. * optional 51 Z 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 52 Safety Occupant safety inflated, the child could be seriously or even fatally injured. Proceed as follows: RDo not use a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. RFit a rearward-facing child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. or ROnly use a forward-facing child seat on the front-passenger seat and move the front-passenger seat to its rearmost position. RHave the automatic child seat recognition checked at a qualified specialist workshop. 52 To ensure that the automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat functions correctly, never place objects (such as a cushion) under the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always be resting on the seat cushion. An incorrectly fitted child restraint system cannot perform its intended protective function in the event of an accident, and could even lead to injuries. i The windowbag, the sidebag and the belt tensioner on the front-passenger side are still active even if the front-passenger front airbag is disabled. G Risk of injury Do not place items of electronic equipment on the front-passenger seat, e.g.: Rlaptops, Rmobile if switched on phones Rcards with transponders, e.g. ski passes or access passes Signals from electronic equipment can cause interference in the automatic child seat recognition sensor system. This can lead to a system malfunction. This may cause the 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp to light up without there being a child seat with automatic child seat recognition fitted. This means the frontpassenger airbag is not deployed during an accident. It is also possible that the 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp will not light up if you turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2. 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 53 Safety Occupant safety Suitable positioning of the child restraint system Weight categories and ages Child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat Group 0: up to 10 kg; Up to approximately 9 months Vehicles with automatic child seat recogni- Universal or as recommended tion* on the front-passenger seat: as recommended7 Group 0+: up to 13 kg; Up to approximately 18 months Group I: 9 to 18 kg; Between approximately 8 months and 4 years As recommended Child restraint system on the left-hand and right-hand rear seats Universal or as recommended Category II/III: 15 to 36 kg Between approximately 3½ and 12 years 7 Only use child restraint systems with automatic child seat recognition * optional 53 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 54 Safety Occupant safety "Universal" category child restraint systems can be recognised by their orange approval label. Example of an approval label on the child restraint system Recommended child restraint systems Weight categories and ages Manufacturer Type Group 0: up to 10 kg; Up to approximately 9 months Britax-Römer BABY SAFE PLUS E1 03 301146 A 000 970 10 00 Yes Group 0+: up to 13 kg; Up to approximately 18 months Britax-Römer BABY SAFE PLUS E1 03 301146 A 000 970 10 00 Yes 54 Approval number Daimler order num- Automatic child seat ber recognition 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 55 Safety Occupant safety Weight categories and ages Manufacturer Type Approval number Daimler order num- Automatic child seat ber recognition Group I: 9 to 18 kg; Between approximately 8 months and 4 years Britax-Römer DUO PLUS E1 03 301133 A 000 970 11 00 Yes A 000 970 16 00 No8 Group II/III: 15 to 36 kg; Between approximately 3½ and 12 years Britax-Römer A 000 970 12 00 Yes A 000 970 17 00 No8 ISOFIX* child seat securing system in the rear ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for specially-designed child seats in the rear. There are securing rings for two child restraint systems on the left-hand and righthand rear seats between the seat cushions and the backrest. G Risk of injury A child restraint system secured by the ISOFIX child seat securing system does not provide sufficient protection for children weighing more than 22 kg. For this reason, do not secure children weighing more than 22 kg in a child restraint system secured by 8 KID E1 03 301148 the ISOFIX child seat securing system. If the child weighs more than 22 kg, secure the child restraint system using a lap-shoulder belt. G Risk of injury If the child restraint system is not fitted correctly to a suitable vehicle seat, it cannot perform its protective function. The child cannot be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. This may lead to serious or even fatal injuries. For this reason, when fitting a child restraint system observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and correct use of the child restraint system. On the rear seats, only use child restraint systems with an ISOFIX child seat securing system which have been recommended for use in Mercedes-Benz vehicles. An incorrectly fitted child restraint system could come loose and seriously or even fatally injure the child or other vehicle occupants. When fitting the child restraint system, make sure that it is engaged in the securing rings on both sides. G Risk of injury Please note that child restraint systems cannot provide a protective function if they For child restraint systems without automatic child seat recognition, move the front-passenger seat to the rearmost position. * optional 55 Z 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 56 Safety Occupant safety or their retaining systems are damaged or have been subjected to a load in an accident. This can result in serious or even fatal injury to the secured child in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change in direction. For this reason, have child restraint systems and their anchorages that are damaged or which have been subjected to a load in an accident checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Child-proof locks for the rear doors The child-proof locks on the rear doors enable you to secure each door individually. You cannot open a locked door from the inside. You can open the door from the outside if the vehicle is unlocked. G Risk of accident and injury If children are travelling in the vehicle, activate the child-proof locks for the rear doors and the override switch for the rear windows. The children could otherwise open the doors or windows while the vehicle is in motion and injure themselves or others. 1 Securing rings Child-proof locks If children are travelling in the vehicle, you can activate the child-proof locks for the rear. 56 1 To activate 2 To deactivate X To activate: press locking lever upwards 1. X Make sure that the child-proof locks are working properly. X To deactivate: press locking lever downwards 2. Override feature for the rear windows G Risk of accident and injury If children are travelling in the vehicle, activate the child-proof locks for the rear doors and the override switch for the rear windows. The children could otherwise open the doors or windows while the vehicle is in motion and injure themselves or others. 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 57 Safety Driving safety systems Driving safety systems In this section, you will find information about the following driving safety systems: RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) RBAS (Brake Assist System) RAdaptive RESP® REBV 1 Button 2 Indicator lamp X X To activate: press button 1. Indicator lamp 2 lights up. The rear side windows can only be operated using the switches on the driver's door. To deactivate: press button 1. Indicator lamp 2 goes out. You can operate the rear side windows using the switches in the rear compartment. brake lamps (Electronic Stability Program) (electronic brake-power distribution) RADAPTIVE BRAKE i In wintry road conditions, always use winter tyres (M+S tyres) and, where necessary, snow chains. Only in this way will the driving safety systems described in this section work as effectively as possible. G Risk of accident The risk of an accident is significantly increased by driving too fast. This is particularly the case when cornering on wet and slippery roads and when driving too close to the vehicle in front. The driving safety systems described in this section cannot reduce this risk or override the laws of physics. For this reason, always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Maintain sufficient distance from other road users and objects on the road. ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake. This allows you to continue steering the vehicle when braking. ABS works from a speed of about 8 km/h upwards, regardless of road surface conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you only brake gently. G Risk of accident Do not depress the brake pedal several times in quick succession (pumping). Depress the brake firmly and evenly. Pumping the brake pedal reduces the braking effect. Braking If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. Z 57 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 58 Safety Driving safety systems If ABS intervenes: X Continue to depress the brake pedal with force until the braking situation is over. For full braking application: X Depress the brake pedal with maximum force. G Risk of accident If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. This limits the steerability of the vehicle when braking and the braking distance may increase. If ABS is deactivated due to a malfunction, then BAS and ESP are also deactivated. The risk of your vehicle skidding is then increased in certain situations. You should therefore always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. 58 BAS (Brake Assist) BAS operates in emergency braking situations. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking force, thus shortening the stopping distance. X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. G Risk of accident If BAS has malfunctioned, the braking system remains available with full brake boosting effect. However, braking force is not automatically increased in emergency braking situations and the stopping distance may increase. Adaptive brake lamps i Adaptive brake lamps are only available in certain countries. If you brake sharply from a speed of more than 50 km/h or if braking is assisted by BAS, the brake lamps flash rapidly. In this way, traffic travelling behind you is warned in an even more noticeable manner. If you brake from a speed of more than 70 km/h and bring the vehicle to a halt, the hazard warning lamps switch on automatically once the vehicle is stationary and the brake lamps light up constantly if you depress the brake pedal again. The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if you travel faster than 10 km/h again. 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 59 Safety Driving safety systems ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e. power transmission between the tyres and the road surface. If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, one or more wheels are braked to stabilise the vehicle. The engine output is also modified, if necessary, to keep the vehicle on the desired course within the scope of the laws of physics. ESP® assists the driver when pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilise the vehicle during braking. When ESP® intervenes, the v warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. G Risk of accident If the v warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes, proceed as follows: RDo not deactivate ESP® under any circumstances. ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. RAdapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. ESP® cannot reduce the risk of an accident if you drive too fast. ESP® cannot override the laws of physics. ! If the vehicle is to be towed with the front or rear axle raised, the ignition must be switched off (key in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock). Application of the brakes by ESP® could otherwise destroy the brake system on the front or rear axle. i Only use wheels with the recommended tyre sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly. To deactivate/activate ESP® ESP® is activated automatically when the engine is running. It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Rwhen Rin using snow chains G Risk of accident Activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. If you deactivate ESP®: RESP® no longer improves driving stability REngine torque is not limited and the drive wheels are able to spin. The spinning wheels produce a cutting effect for better traction. Rtraction control is still activated. RESP® still provides support when you brake. i If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the v warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. ESP® does not, stabilise the vehicle. deep snow Ron sand or gravel The vehicle could otherwise go into a skid. 59 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 60 Safety Driving safety systems X To activate: press button 1. The v warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. EBV (electronic brake-power distribution) 1 To deactivate/activate ESP® X To deactivate: press button 1. The v warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. G Risk of accident If the v warning lamp in the instrument cluster is permanently lit when the engine is running, ESP® is deactivated or not available due to a malfunction. The risk of your vehicle skidding is then increased in certain situations. You should always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. 60 EBV monitors and controls the brake pressure on the rear wheels to improve driving stability under braking. G Risk of accident If EBV is malfunctioning, the brake system is still available with full brake boosting effect. However, the rear wheels can still lock, e.g. under full braking. This could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style to the different handling characteristics. ADAPTIVE BRAKE Due to its higher level of braking safety, ADAPTIVE BRAKE offers exceptional braking comfort. In addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also features the convenience function HOLD (Y page 144). For further information, see Driving tips (Y page 206). 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 61 Safety Anti-theft systems Anti-theft systems Immobiliser The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct key. Activating the immobiliser X With the key: remove the key from the ignition lock. X With KEYLESS GO*: press the KEYLESS GO button on the selector lever. The engine switches off. A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is primed and you open: Ra door Ra door using the emergency key element Rthe boot lid Rthe bonnet The alarm is not switched off even if you close an open door again. With the key: turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X With KEYLESS GO*: press the KEYLESS GO button on the selector lever twice without depressing the brake. i The immobiliser is always deactivated when you start the engine. * optional X To deactivate: unlock the vehicle using the key. On vehicles with KEYLESS GO*, you can also unlock the vehicle by opening the door/boot lid. Switching off the alarm X Deactivating the immobiliser X button on the door handle/boot lid can also be used. Indicator lamp 1 flashes. The alarm system is primed after approximately 15 seconds. ATA* (anti-theft alarm system) With the key: insert the key into the ignition lock. The alarm is switched off. or X Press the Œ or ‹ button on the key. The alarm is switched off. X With KEYLESS GO*: pull the door handle. The key must be outside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off. 1 Indicator lamp X To prime: lock the vehicle using the key. On vehicles with KEYLESS GO*, the locking or X Press the KEYLESS GO button on the selector lever. The key must be inside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off. 61 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 62 Safety Anti-theft systems Tow-away protection* Interior motion sensor* An audible and visual alarm is triggered if your vehicle's angle of inclination is altered while tow-away protection is primed. This happens if the vehicle is jacked up on one side, for example. If the interior motion sensor is primed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered if movement is detected in the vehicle interior while the vehicle is locked. This occurs, for example, if someone breaks the side windows of your vehicle or reaches into the vehicle's interior. Priming tow-away protection X Lock the vehicle using the key. On vehicles with KEYLESS GO*, the locking button on the door handle/boot lid can also be used. Tow-away protection is primed after approximately 30 seconds. 1 To deactivate tow-away protection 2 Indicator lamp X Remove the key from the ignition lock. X Press button 1. Indicator lamp 2 lights up briefly. To deactivate tow-away protection When you unlock your vehicle using the key or KEYLESS GO*, tow-away protection is automatically deactivated. Deactivate tow-away protection manually to prevent a false alarm if your vehicle: Ris being transported Ris being loaded, e.g. onto a ferry or car transporter X Lock the vehicle using the key. On vehicles with KEYLESS GO*, the locking button on the door handle/boot lid can also be used. Tow-away protection remains deactivated until the vehicle is unlocked and locked again. Priming the interior motion sensor X Make sure that: Rthe side windows are closed Rthe sliding/tilting sunroof* is closed Rthere are no objects, e.g. mascots, hang- ing on the rear-view mirror or on the grasp handles on the roof trim. This will prevent false alarms. X Lock the vehicle using the key or, on vehicles with KEYLESS GO*, using the locking buttons on the door handle/boot lid. The interior motion sensor is primed after approximately 30 seconds. Ris being parked on a movable surface, e.g. split-level garages 62 * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 63 Safety Anti-theft systems To deactivate the interior motion sensor To prevent a false alarm, deactivate the interior motion sensor if you lock your vehicle and Rpeople or animals remain in the vehicle Rthe windows remain open Rthe sliding/tilting sunroof* remains open X Remove the key from the ignition lock. X Press button 1. Indicator lamp 2 flashes briefly. X Lock the vehicle using the key. On vehicles with KEYLESS GO*, the locking button on the door handle/boot lid can also be used. The interior motion sensor remains deactivated until the vehicle is unlocked and locked again. 1 To deactivate the interior motion sensor 2 Indicator lamp * optional 63 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 64 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 64 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 65 Controls Opening and closing ........................... Key positions ....................................... Seats .................................................... Steering wheel .................................... Mirrors ................................................. 66 74 75 81 83 Memory functions* ............................. Seat belts ............................................. Lights ................................................... Windscreen wipers ............................. Side windows ...................................... 86 88 91 97 98 Driving and parking .......................... Transmission ..................................... Instrument cluster ............................ On-board computer .......................... Driving systems ................................ Air conditioning ................................. Sliding sunroof .................................. Loading and stowing ........................ Features ............................................. 101 104 109 111 132 151 169 172 180 65 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 66 Controls Opening and closing Opening and closing Factory settings Key X The vehicle's equipment includes two keys with remote control. Each key contains an emergency key element. The key is configured at the factory to centrally lock and unlock the following: Rthe doors Rthe boot lid Rthe fuel filler flap G Risk of accident Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could open a door from the inside, even if it has been locked, or start the vehicle if the key is left in it. They could endanger themselves and others. You should therefore take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for a short time. 1 j Locking button 2 i Unlocking button for the boot lid i If you do not open either a door or the boot lid after you have unlocked the vehicle, it will automatically relock after approximately 40 seconds. 3 k Unlocking button 4 Battery check lamp i The key can also be used to open and close the sliding/tilting sunroof* and the side windows. You can open them using the summer opening feature (Y page 100). You can close them using the convenience closing feature (Y page 100). To unlock centrally: press the k button. The turn signals flash once. The locking knobs in the doors pop up. The anti-theft alarm system* is deactivated. When it is dark, the surround lighting also comes on if it is activated in the on-board computer. X To lock centrally: press the j button. The turn signals flash three times if the doors and boot lid are closed. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. The antitheft alarm system* and the immobiliser are primed. Individual settings You can change the setting of the locking system in such a way that pressing the k button only unlocks the driver's door and the fuel filler flap. This is useful if you frequently travel on your own. 66 * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 67 Controls Opening and closing X To change the setting: press the k and j buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice. The key now functions as follows: X To unlock the driver's door: press the k button once. X To unlock centrally: press the k button twice. X To lock centrally: press the j button. KEYLESS GO* If you are carrying the KEYLESS GO key on your person, you can use the KEYLESS GO functions of your vehicle. The KEYLESS GO key should not be more than one metre away from the vehicle. However, you can also use the KEYLESS GO key like a normal key with remote control. When you pull the door handle, the following unlock centrally if the factory settings have not been changed: Rthe doors Restoring the factory settings Rthe boot lid X Rthe fuel filler flap Press the k and j buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice. * optional G Risk of accident Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could open a door from the inside at any time, even if it has been locked. Or they could start the vehicle if a valid KEYLESS GO key is in the vehicle and they press the KEYLESS GO button on the gear selector lever. They could endanger themselves and others. Switch off the engine and take the KEYLESS GO key with you, even if you are only leaving the vehicle for a short time. 1 j Locking button 2 i Unlocking button for the boot lid 3 k Unlocking button 4 Battery check lamp i You can also use the KEYLESS GO key to open and close the side windows and sliding/tilting sunroof* . You can open them using the summer opening feature (Y page 100). You can close them using the convenience closing feature (Y page 100). i If the vehicle has been parked for a long time, you must pull the door handle to activate the KEYLESS GO functions. 67 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 68 Controls Opening and closing Important notes RIf the KEYLESS GO key is removed from the vehicle (in luggage or an article of clothing, for instance), it will no longer be possible to lock or start the vehicle. RIf the KEYLESS GO key is removed from the vehicle while the engine is running, e.g. if the front passenger leaves the vehicle with the KEYLESS GO key, the following message will appear in the multi-function display as you pull away: Key not detected. RIf the KEYLESS GO key is in the vehicle, the vehicle can be started at any time. If you have left the KEYLESS GO key in the vehicle, you will see the following message in the multi-function display when you lock the vehicle: Key still in vehicle. Factory settings X To unlock centrally: pull the door handle. The turn signals flash once. The locking knobs in the doors pop up. The anti-theft alarm system* is deactivated. When it is dark, the surround lighting also comes on if it is activated in the on-board computer. 68 i If you do not open either a door or the boot lid after you have unlocked the vehicle, it will automatically relock after approximately 40 seconds. i When a door is opened, the side window on that side opens slightly. When the door is closed, the side window closes again. ! The side windows will not open or close if the battery is discharged or if the side windows have iced up. It will not be possible to close the door. Do not attempt to force the door closed. You could otherwise damage the door or the window. i There is a danger of the vehicle being unlocked accidentally. This could happen if the KEYLESS GO key is within one metre of the vehicle and the door handle is splashed by water. This could also happen when you are cleaning the door handle. 1 Locking button on the door handle X To lock centrally: press locking button 1 on the door handle. The turn signals flash three times. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. The antitheft alarm system* and the immobiliser are primed. Individual settings You can change the setting of the locking system. When you now grasp the door handle on the driver's door, you will only unlock the driver's door and the fuel filler flap. This is useful if you frequently travel on your own. X To change the setting: press the k and j buttons simultaneously for * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 69 Controls Opening and closing approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice. The KEYLESS GO key will now function as follows: X To unlock the driver's door: pull the door handle on the driver's door. X To unlock centrally: pull the door handle on the front-passenger door or on the rear doors. X To lock centrally: press locking button 1 on the door handle. Restoring the factory settings X Press the k and j buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice. Locking from the boot* On vehicles with KEYLESS GO* and remote boot lid closing*, you can close the boot lid automatically and thereby centrally lock your vehicle (Y page 73). Opening the doors from the inside You can open a door from the inside at any time, even if it has been locked. ble to close the door. Do not attempt to force the door closed. You could otherwise damage the door or the window. Automatic locking feature The vehicle will lock automatically once you have pulled away. You can switch off the automatic locking function via the on-board computer (Y page 127). i The vehicle is locked automatically when 1 Locking knob 2 Door handle X the ignition is switched on and the wheels begin to turn. There is therefore a risk of being locked out when the vehicle is being pushed or tested on a dynamometer. Pull door handle 2. If the door is locked, locking knob 1 pops up. The door is unlocked and can be opened. i When a door is opened, the side window on that side opens slightly. When the door is closed, the side window closes again. ! The side windows will not open or close if the battery is discharged or if the side windows have iced up. It will not be possi* optional 69 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 70 Controls Opening and closing Locking/unlocking the vehicle from the inside You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from the inside. This feature may be useful if, for example, you wish to unlock the frontpassenger door from the inside or lock the vehicle before you pull away. G Risk of accident Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could open a door from the inside – even if it is locked – and thereby endanger themselves and others. Boot (vehicles without remote boot lid closing feature*) G Risk of poisoning Exhaust fumes could enter the vehicle interior if the engine is running and the boot lid is open. This could poison you. Therefore, you should make sure that the boot lid is always closed when the engine is running. ! The boot lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is enough space above the boot lid. Opening from the outside You can only open the boot lid after unlocking it first. X To unlock centrally: press the k button on the key. 1 Unlocking button 2 Locking button X To unlock: press button 1. X To lock: press button 2. 70 1 Handle X Pull handle 1. X Raise the boot lid. Opening from the outside using the key You can unlock and open the boot lid simultaneously with the key when the vehicle is stationary. X Press and hold the i button on the key until the boot lid opens. Closing from the outside G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped as you close the boot lid. * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 71 Controls Opening and closing i Do not leave the key in the boot. You could otherwise lock yourself out. 1 Remote unlocking switch X 1 Recess X Pull the boot lid down using recess 1. X Lock the vehicle if necessary using the j button on the key or with KEYLESS GO*. Opening from the inside You can simultaneously unlock and open the boot from the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary. 9 Pull remote unlocking switch 1 until the boot lid opens. The indicator lamp in the switch lights up and stays lit until the boot is closed again. Locking the boot separately $ Basic position % To lock separately X Insert the emergency key element fully into the boot lock. X Turn the emergency key element clockwise to position %. X Remove the emergency key element. You can lock the boot separately9. If you then unlock the vehicle centrally, the boot remains locked and cannot be opened. X Close the boot lid. X Remove the emergency key element from the key (Y page 266). Not available in all countries. * optional 71 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 72 Controls Opening and closing Boot (vehicles with remote boot lid closing feature*) X To unlock centrally: press the k button on the key. You can close the boot lid from the outside using the closing button in the boot lid. The remote boot lid closing feature* opens and closes the boot lid automatically. You can stop the automatic opening and closing procedure at any time: Rby pulling or pressing the remote operating switch at the driver's seat Rby pressing the i button on the key Rby pulling the handle on the boot lid Rby pressing the closing button in the boot lid G Risk of poisoning Exhaust fumes could enter the vehicle interior if the engine is running and the boot lid is open. This could poison you. Therefore, you should make sure that the boot lid is always closed when the engine is running. ! The boot lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is enough space above the boot lid. Opening from the outside You can only open the boot lid after unlocking it first. 72 Closing from the outside (without KEYLESS GO*) G Risk of injury Monitor the boot lid closing procedure to make sure that nobody can become trapped. Press the closing button in the boot lid again or press the i button on the key to halt the closing procedure. i Do not leave the key in the boot. You could otherwise lock yourself out. 1 Handle X Pull handle 1. The boot lid opens. Opening from the outside using the key You can unlock and open the boot lid simultaneously with the key when the vehicle is stationary. X Press and hold the i button on the key until the boot lid opens. 1 Closing button X Press closing button 1. The boot lid closes automatically. * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 73 Controls Opening and closing Closing from the outside and locking centrally (using KEYLESS GO*) You can close the boot lid from the outside using the closing button in the boot lid, or you can close and centrally lock the vehicle simultaneously with the KEYLESS GO button*. G Risk of injury Monitor the boot lid closing procedure to make sure that nobody can become trapped. Press the closing button in the boot lid again or press the i button on the key to halt the closing procedure. i Do not leave the key in the boot. You could otherwise lock yourself out. 2 KEYLESS GO button* X To close: press closing button 1. X To close and lock centrally: press KEYLESS GO button* 2. i If you leave a KEYLESS GO key* in the boot, the boot lid will not lock. Opening and closing from inside the vehicle You can open and close the boot lid from the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary. 1 Remote operating switch X To open: pull remote operating switch 1 until the boot lid opens. The indicator lamp lights up. X To close: press remote operating switch 1 until the boot lid is closed. The indicator lamp goes out. G Risk of injury Monitor the boot lid closing procedure to make sure that nobody can become trapped. Release the remote operating switch to stop the closing procedure. Locking the boot separately You can lock the boot separately10 (Y page 71). 1 Closing button 10 Not available in all countries. * optional 73 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 74 Controls Key positions Key positions Key KEYLESS GO* If you press the KEYLESS GO button repeatedly without depressing the brake pedal, its function corresponds to the different key positions in the ignition lock. If you depress the brake pedal and press the KEYLESS GO button, the engine starts immediately. i In order for the engine to be started using the KEYLESS GO button, the KEYLESS GO key must be in the vehicle. Ignition lock i If there is a key in the ignition lock, it has priority over the KEYLESS GO function. } To remove the key If KEYLESS GO button 1 has not yet been pressed, this corresponds to "key removed" or position 0. X Position 1: press KEYLESS GO button 1 once. It is now possible to switch on the windscreen wipers, for example. i If you now press KEYLESS GO button 1 twice, the power supply is disconnected again. X Position 2 (ignition): press KEYLESS GO button 1 twice. i If you now press KEYLESS GO button 1 once, the power supply is disconnected again. $ Power supply for some consumers, such as the windscreen wipers % Ignition (power supply for all consumers) and drive position & To start the engine 1 KEYLESS GO button 74 * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 75 Controls Seats Seats Depending on the vehicle's equipment, seat adjustments can be made either manually/ electrically or electrically*. G Risk of injury The seats can still be adjusted when there is no key in the ignition lock. For this reason, children should never be left unsupervised in the vehicle. They could become trapped by a seat adjustment movement. G Risk of accident Only adjust the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary. You will otherwise be distracted from the road and traffic conditions and you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the seat moving. This could cause an accident. ! When you move the seats, make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats. Otherwise, you could damage the seats and the objects. i The head restraints in the front seats are fitted with the NECK-PRO system (Y page 49). For this reason, it is not possible to remove the head restraints from the front seats. For design reasons, the rear-compartment head restraints cannot be removed. Please contact a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for more information. 2 Seat height 3 Backrest angle 4 Seat fore-and-aft adjustment Seat fore-and-aft adjustment X Slide the button forwards or back in direction of arrow 4. Backrest angle X Slide the button forwards or back in direction of arrow 3. Seat height Adjusting the seats manually and electrically G Risk of injury X Slide the button up or down in direction of arrow 2. Seat cushion angle Make sure that nobody can become trapped as you adjust the seat. Observe the notes concerning the airbag system. Secure children as recommended; see the "Children in the vehicle" section. Adjust the angle so that your thighs are lightly supported. X Slide the button up or down in direction of arrow 1. 1 Seat cushion angle * optional 75 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 76 Controls Seats Head restraint height Head restraint position G Risk of injury Make sure that the central area of the head restraint supports the back of your head at about eye level. You could seriously injure your neck if your head is not correctly supported by the head restraint in the event of an accident. Never travel without a correctly adjusted and engaged head restraint. X Push or pull the head restraint in direction of the arrow. 1 To adjust the head restraint side bolsters 2 To move the head restraint back and forth X To adjust the side bolsters of the head restraint: push or pull the right and/or lefthand side bolster 1 into the desired position. X To move the head restraint back and forth: push or pull the head restraint in direction of arrow 2. Luxury head restraint* G Risk of injury 1 Release catch X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the desired position. X To lower: press release catch 1 in direction of the arrow and push the head restraint down to the desired position. 76 When folding back the head restraint side bolsters, do not put your hands between the side bolster and the cushion holder. There is a danger of entrapment. * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 77 Controls Seats Adjusting the seat electrically* Seat cushion angle Head restraint position Adjust the angle so that your thighs are lightly supported. X Slide the button up or down in direction of arrow 2. Backrest angle X 1 Head restraint height 2 Seat cushion angle 3 Seat height 4 Seat fore-and-aft adjustment 5 Backrest angle Seat fore-and-aft adjustment X Slide the button forwards or back in direction of arrow 4. Seat height X Slide the button forwards or back in direction of arrow 5. Head restraint height G Risk of injury Make sure that the central area of the head restraint supports the back of your head at about eye level. You could seriously injure your neck if your head is not correctly supported by the head restraint in the event of an accident. Never travel without a correctly adjusted and engaged head restraint. X Slide the button up or down in direction of arrow 1. X Push or pull the head restraint in direction of the arrow. Luxury head restraint* G Risk of injury When folding back the head restraint side bolsters, do not put your hands between the side bolster and the cushion holder. There is a danger of entrapment. Slide the button up or down in direction of arrow 3. * optional 77 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 78 Controls Seats Lumbar support The lumbar support for the driver's seat can be adjusted to provide optimum support for your back. Rear seat head restraints G Risk of injury On a seat which is occupied, move the head restraint into the upright position. This reduces the risk of injury to the passenger in the event of an accident. Folding up the head restraints 1 To adjust the head restraint side bolsters 2 To move the head restraint back and forth X X To adjust the side bolsters of the head restraint: push or pull right-hand and/or left-hand side bolster 1 into the desired position. To move the head restraint back and forth: push or pull the head restraint in direction of arrow 2. 1 Adjustment lever X Move adjustment lever 1 in the direction of the arrow until the desired backrest contour is achieved. X 78 Pull the head restraint in the direction of the arrow until it engages. 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 79 Controls Seats Folding back the head restraints from the front Multi-contour seat* X Press button 3 to move the point of greatest backrest curvature downwards to the lumbar region and press button 2 to move it upwards to the upper back region. X Adjust the side cushions of the backrest using button 1 so that you have good lateral support. You can set the contour of the seat to provide optimum support for your back. Dynamic multi-contour seat* 1 Button for folding back the rear seat head restraints 1 Backrest side cushions X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. 2 Upper back support 3 Lumbar region support X Press button 1. 4 Thigh cushion The dynamic multi-contour seat automatically adapts the sides of the backrest to your current driving style. You can set the backrest-side adaptation to Gentle or Vigorous in the on-board computer (Y page 121). Adjusting the contour of the backrest X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Use switch 4 to move the thigh cushion into the desired position. X Press the æ or ç button to adjust the contour of the backrest to suit your back. 1 To switch dynamic multi-contour seat on or off Z 2 Backrest side cushions * optional 79 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 80 Controls Seats 3 Massage function 4 Upper back support 5 Lumbar region support 6 Seat cushion length X Seat ventilation* The three blue indicator lamps in the button indicate the ventilation level you have selected. To activate/deactivate: press button 1. The indicator lamp in the button lights up/ goes out. When switched on, the message Driving dynamics seat adjustment appears in the multi-function display for five seconds. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat ventilation switches off temporarily. Seat heating* The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected. Massage function (PULSE) The massage function helps you to prevent muscle tension on long journeys. X Press button 3. The indicator lamp in the button lights up. The air cushions in the lumbar region vibrate for approximately five minutes. 1 Seat ventilation X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: press button 1 repeatedly until the required ventilation level is set. 1 Front-seat heating i If you open the side windows and the sliding sunroof* using the key (Y page 100), the driver's seat ventilation automatically switches to the highest level. X 80 To switch off: press button 1 repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 81 Controls Steering wheel i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off. One or more indicator lamps will then light up briefly. Steering wheel Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can adjust the steering wheel either manually or electrically*. G Risk of injury 1 Rear-seat heating i The system automatically switches down from level 3 to level 2 after approximately five minutes. The system automatically switches down from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes. The system automatically switches off approximately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1. X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: press button 1 repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. X To switch off: press button 1 repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. * optional The electrically adjustable steering wheel* can be adjusted when the key is removed from the ignition lock. Therefore, do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle as they could become trapped as the steering wheel is adjusted. G Risk of accident Only adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is stationary and do not pull away until the steering wheel adjustment mechanism is locked in position. You might otherwise drive without the steering wheel adjustment mechanism being locked in position. As a result you could be distracted from road and traffic conditions by an unexpected movement of the steering wheel and thereby cause an accident. However, the steerability of the vehicle is not affected. When you adjust the steering wheel, make sure that: 81 Z 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 82 Controls Steering wheel Rthe steering wheel can be reached with your arms slightly bent Ryou can move your legs freely Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly Adjusting the steering wheel manually X Pull handle 1 out completely. The steering column is unlocked. X Set the desired steering wheel position. X Push handle 1 in completely until it engages fully. The steering wheel is locked in position. REasy-entry/exit RStoring feature (Y page 83) settings (Y page 86) Steering wheel heating* Adjusting the steering wheel electrically* 1 To switch on the steering-wheel heating 2 To switch off the steering-wheel heating 3 Indicator lamp 1 Release handle 2 Steering column height 3 Steering column fore-and-aft adjustment 1 Steering column fore-and-aft adjustment 2 Steering column height X Press the lever in direction of arrow 1 or 2 until the steering wheel has moved into the desired position. You can find more information under: 82 X To switch on or off: make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Turn the lever in direction of arrow 1 or 2. Indicator lamp 3 comes on or goes out. i The steering-wheel heating does not switch off automatically. * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 83 Controls Mirrors Easy-entry/exit feature* The Easy-entry/exit feature makes getting in and out of your vehicle easier. The steering wheel swings upwards when you: Rremove the key from the ignition lock Ropen the driver's door when the key is in the ignition lock or in position 1 The steering wheel is moved automatically to the position previously set when the key is inserted into the ignition lock with the driver's door closed. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could open the driver's door and thereby unintentionally activate the easy-entry feature and become trapped. The most recent position of the steering wheel is stored when you switch off the ignition or when you store a memory position (Y page 86). You can activate and deactivate the Easyentry/exit feature via the on-board computer (Y page 128). Mirrors Before starting off, adjust the mirrors in such a way that you can get a good overview of road and traffic conditions. Rear-view mirror X Adjust the rear-view mirror manually. Rear-view mirror (manual anti-dazzle) G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped when you activate the easy-entry/exit feature. If there is a risk of becoming trapped, stop the adjustment procedure. To halt the procedure: Rpress the steering-column adjustment switch 1 Anti-dazzle switch Rpress X one of the memory function position buttons Anti-dazzle mode: flick anti-dazzle switch 1 forwards or back. The steering column stops moving immediately. * optional 83 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 84 Controls Mirrors Exterior mirrors G Risk of accident The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the image. Objects are actually closer than they appear. You could misjudge the distance from vehicles driving behind and cause an accident, e.g. when changing lane. For this reason, make sure of the actual distance from the vehicle driving behind by glancing over your shoulder. The convex exterior mirrors give a larger field of vision. At low outside temperatures, the exterior mirrors are heated automatically. 2 Adjustment button 3 Right-hand exterior mirror X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press button 3 for the right-hand exterior mirror or button 1 for the left-hand exterior mirror. X X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Briefly press button 1. Both exterior mirrors fold in or out. i If you are driving faster than 47 km/h, you can no longer fold in the exterior mirrors. Make sure that the exterior mirrors are always folded out fully while the vehicle is in motion; otherwise, they may vibrate. Press adjustment button 2 up, down, or to the left or right until you have adjusted the exterior mirror to the correct position. Resetting the exterior mirrors Folding the exterior mirrors in or out electrically* Adjusting the exterior mirrors If the battery has been disconnected or has become discharged, the exterior mirrors must be reset. Otherwise, they will not fold in when you select the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function in the on-board computer (Y page 128). X Make sure that the key is in position 1 in the ignition lock. X 1 To fold the exterior mirrors in or out 1 Left-hand exterior mirror 84 Briefly press button 1. Folding the exterior mirrors in or out automatically* If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 128): * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 85 Controls Mirrors RThe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as RThe extended, the mirrors' automatic anti-dazzle function will not operate. Incident light could then dazzle you. This may prevent you from observing the traffic conditions, thereby causing an accident. In this case, adjust the rear-view mirror manually. i If you have activated this function and fold G Risk of injury soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside. exterior mirrors fold out again automatically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and then open the driver's or frontpassenger door. in the exterior mirrors using button 1, they will not be folded out automatically. You can then only fold out the exterior mirrors using button 1. Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors* The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on the driver's side automatically go into antidazzle mode if the ignition is switched on and incident light from headlamps strikes the sensor in the rear-view mirror. The mirrors do not go into anti-dazzle mode if reverse gear is engaged and the interior lighting is switched on. G Risk of accident Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-dazzle mirror breaks. Electrolyte is an aggressive irritant and must not be allowed to come into contact with your skin, eyes or respiratory organs. If electrolyte comes into contact with your eyes or skin, rinse thoroughly with clean water immediately. Consult a doctor if necessary. Parking aid* The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves into the parking position as soon as you engage reverse gear. 1 Exterior mirror on the driver's side 2 Exterior mirror on the front-passenger side ! If electrolyte comes into contact with the X vehicle paintwork, immediately rinse off the undried liquid completely with clean water. It will otherwise result in damage to the paintwork. Make sure that the parking position for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side is stored with the memory function (Y page 87). X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. If the incident light from headlamps cannot strike the sensor in the rear-view mirror, for instance when the rear window blind* is * optional Z 85 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 86 Controls Memory functions* X X Make sure that button 2 for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side is pressed. Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the stored parking position. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves back to its original position: Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 10 km/h Rabout ten seconds after you have disengaged reverse gear Rif you press button 1 for the exterior mirror on the driver's side Memory functions* Storing settings You can store up to three different settings using the memory button. The following settings are stored as a single memory preset: RPosition of the seat, backrest and head restraint RDynamic traffic conditions by the steering wheel and seat moving of their own accord, and as a result cause an accident. ! If PRE-SAFE®* has been activated, the front-passenger seat is moved to a more favourable position. When you move the seat, make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats. Otherwise, you could damage the seats and the objects. driving seat*: activated/deacti- vated RDriver's side: steering-wheel position RDriver's side: position of the exterior mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger sides G Risk of injury The memory function can also be used when the key has been removed. For this reason, children should never be left unsupervised in the vehicle. They could otherwise become trapped when moving the seat or the steering wheel. G Risk of accident Only activate the memory function on the driver’s side when the vehicle is stationary. You could otherwise be distracted from the 86 M Memory button 1, 2, 3 Storage position switches X Adjust the seat (Y page 75). X On the driver's side, also adjust the steering wheel (Y page 81) and the mirrors (Y page 83). * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 87 Controls Memory functions* X Press the M memory button. X Press one of storage position switches 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds. The settings are stored in the selected preset position. A tone sounds when the settings have been completed. Calling up a stored setting G Risk of accident Only activate the memory function on the driver’s side when the vehicle is stationary. You could otherwise be distracted from the traffic conditions by the steering wheel and seat moving of their own accord, and as a result cause an accident. X Storing a parking position To make it easier to park, you can store the front-passenger side exterior mirror position in such a way that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. You can store a parking position for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side using the memory button. You will find information about using the exterior mirror's parking position in the "Parking aid" section (Y page 85). soon as you release the storage position switch. Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press button 3 for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side. X Use button 2 to adjust the exterior mirror to a position which allows you to see the rear wheel and the kerb. X Press memory button M 4. X Press one of the arrows on adjustment button 2 within three seconds. The parking position is stored if the exterior mirror does not move. i If the mirror moves out of position, repeat the steps. You can adjust the exterior mirror again after storing the setting. Press and hold the relevant storage position switch 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering wheel and mirrors are in the stored position. i The setting procedure is interrupted as X 1 Exterior mirror on the driver's side 2 Adjustment button 3 Exterior mirror on the front-passenger side 4 Memory button M * optional 87 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 88 Controls Seat belts Seat belts Seat belts are the most effective means of restraining the movement of vehicle occupants in the event of an accident. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with the vehicle interior. Wearing seat belts G Risk of injury A seat belt which is not worn correctly, or which has not been engaged in the seat belt buckle correctly, cannot perform its intended protective function. Under certain circumstances this could cause severe or even fatal injuries. Make sure that all occupants – in particular, pregnant women – wear their seat belt correctly at all times. RThe seat belt must pass closely over your body and must not be twisted. You should therefore avoid wearing bulky clothing (e.g. a winter coat). The shoulder belt section must be routed across the middle of your shoulder – on no account across your neck or under your arm – and pulled tight against your upper body. The lap belt must always pass across your lap 88 as low down as possible, i.e. over your hip joints – not across your abdomen. If necessary, push down the belt strap slightly and then retighten it in the roll-up direction. RDo not route the belt strap across sharp or fragile objects, especially if these are located on or in your clothing, e.g. spectacles, pencils, keys, etc. The seat belt strap could be damaged and tear in an accident and you or other vehicle occupants could be injured. ROnly one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Children must never travel sitting on the lap of other occupants. It would not be possible to restrain the child in the event of a sudden change in direction, braking or an accident. This could result in severe or even fatal injuries to the child and other occupants. RPersons less than 1.50 m tall cannot wear the seat belts correctly. For this reason, secure persons less than 1.50 m tall in specially designed, suitable restraint systems. RChildren less than 1.50 m tall or under 12 years of age cannot wear the seat belts properly. Therefore, always secure these children in suitable child restraint systems on suitable vehicle seats. You can find more information under "Children in the vehicle" in the "Safety" section of the Owner's Manual. Follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when fitting the child restraint system. RDo not secure any objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. G Risk of injury The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection unless the backrest is almost vertical. Under certain circumstances this could cause severe or even fatal injuries. Before starting a journey, make sure that the seat is properly adjusted and that the backrest is almost vertical. G Risk of injury A dirty or damaged seat belt or a seat belt that has been subjected to a load in an accident or modified no longer offers the intended level of protection. Under certain circumstances this could cause severe or even fatal injuries. 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 89 Controls Seat belts For this reason, check regularly that the seat belts are not damaged or dirty. Always have damaged seat belts or seat belts that have been subjected to a load in an accident replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Choose a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use seat belts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. X Engage belt tongue 2 into buckle3. X If necessary, adjust the belt to the appropriate height (Y page 90). X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder section of the belt to tighten the belt across your body. Routing the belt X 1 Belt sash guide 2 Belt tongue 3 Buckle 4 Release button Routing the belt X Adjust the seat and move the backrest to an almost vertical position (Y page 75). X Pull the belt smoothly through belt sash guide 1. X Route the belt over the centre of the shoulder without twisting it. Press release button 4 and guide belt tongue 2 back towards belt sash guide 1. Belt warning for driver and front passenger The < seat belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster reminds you that all occupants should fasten their seat belts. The < seat belt warning lamp may light up continuously or it may flash. Additionally, there may be a warning tone. The < seat belt warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases when the driver and the front passenger have fastened their seat belt. For certain countries only: regardless of whether the driver or the front passenger is 89 Z 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 90 Controls Seat belts already secured, the < seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds after the engine has been started. The < seat belt warning lamp then goes out if both the driver and the front passenger have fastened their seat belt. X To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards. The belt sash guide engages in various positions. X To lower: press and hold release button 1. i Further information about the < seat X Slide the belt sash guide downwards. X Let go of release button 1 and make sure that the belt sash guide has engaged. belt warning lamp (Y page 249). Correct driver's seat position Belt height adjustment You can adjust the seat belt height on the driver's seat and front-passenger seat. Adjust the belt to a height that allows it to be routed across the middle of your shoulder. 1 Steering wheel 2 Seat belt 3 Seat G Risk of accident 1 Release catch 90 Only adjust the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary. You will otherwise be distracted from the road and traffic conditions and you could lose control of the vehicle as 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 91 Controls Lights Ryou have set the seat angle so that your thighs are gently supported a result of the seat moving. This could cause an accident. Ryou G Risk of accident Only adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is stationary and do not pull away until the steering wheel adjustment mechanism is locked in position. You might otherwise drive without the steering wheel adjustment mechanism being locked in position. As a result you could be distracted from road and traffic conditions by an unexpected movement of the steering wheel and thereby cause an accident. However, the steerability of the vehicle is not affected. X Check whether seat 3 and the head restraint are adjusted properly (Y page 75). Make sure that: Ryou are as far away from the driver's front airbag as possible Ryou are sitting in a normal upright posi- tion Ryou can depress the pedals properly Check whether steering wheel 1 is adjusted properly (Y page 81). Make sure that: Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your i If you drive in countries in which traffic have adjusted the head restraint so that the back of your head is supported at eye level by the central area of the head restraint arms slightly bent Ryou can move your legs freely Ryou can see all the displays in the instru- ment cluster clearly X Check whether you have fastened seat belt 2 properly (Y page 88). It should: Rfit snugly across your body drives on the opposite side of the road to the country where the vehicle is registered, oncoming traffic may be dazzled by the asymmetrical dipped-beam headlamps. Have the headlamps changed to symmetrical dipped beam when driving in these countries. You can obtain information about this from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Rbe routed across the middle of your shoulder Rrouted can fasten the seat belt properly Light switch For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you drive with the lights switched on even during the daytime. In some countries, daytime use of headlamps varies due to legal requirements and self-imposed obligations. In these countries, dipped-beam headlamps are switched on when the ignition is switched on. Ryou X Lights in your pelvic area across the hip joints Ryou have moved the backrest to an almost vertical position 91 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 92 Controls Lights ! Switch off the side lamps or parking lamp when you leave the vehicle. This prevents the battery from discharging. Dipped-beam headlamp $ a Left-hand parking lamp % g Right-hand parking lamp & M Lights off/constant headlamp mode ( U Automatic headlamp mode/con- stant headlamp mode ) C Side lamps, licence plate and instru- ment lighting * B Dipped-beam headlamps or mainbeam headlamps , ¥ Front foglamp . † Rear foglamp X Make sure that the key is in position 2 of the ignition lock or that the engine is running. X To switch on: turn the light switch to B. The dipped-beam headlamps, parking lamps and licence plate lamps are switched on. The parking lamp indicator lamp next to the light switch and the green dipped-beam indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. Constant headlamp mode In countries in which constant headlamp mode is not a legal requirement, you can make this setting via the on-board computer. i The exterior lighting automatically switches off when you remove the key from the ignition lock or open the door while the ignition is switched off (ignition key in position 0). 11 This 92 is not possible in countries where constant headlamp mode is required by law. X Make sure that constant headlamp mode has been set with the on-board computer . 11 X To switch on: turn the light switch to M or U. The dipped-beam headlamps, side lamps and licence plate lighting are switched on when the engine is running. i When you turn the light switch to any position other than M or U, the corresponding light goes on. Automatic headlamp mode The side lamps, dipped-beam headlamps and licence plate lighting are switched on or off automatically, depending on the brightness of the ambient light. G Risk of accident If the light switch is set to U, the headlamps may temporarily switch off due to exposure to light, or the lights may not come on automatically if it is foggy. This could endanger you and others. Therefore, turn the light switch to B in the dark or in fog. 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 93 Controls Lights The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle lighting at all times. G Risk of accident When it is dark or foggy, turn the light switch quickly from U to B. You could otherwise cause an accident if the headlamps were to switch off temporarily. X To switch on: turn the light switch to U. The side lamps are switched on and off automatically when the key is in position 1 in the ignition lock. The dipped-beam headlamps, side lamps and licence plate lighting are switched on automatically when the engine is running. When the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on, the indicator lamp next to the light switch and the green dipped-beam indicator lamp in the instrument cluster light up. Front foglamps/rear foglamp G Risk of accident If you suspect that driving conditions will be foggy, turn the light switch to B before you start your journey. Otherwise, your vehicle may not be visible and you could therefore endanger yourself and others. G Risk of accident When it is dark or foggy, turn the light switch quickly from U to B. You could otherwise cause an accident if the headlamps were to switch off temporarily. X To switch on the rear foglamp: turn the light switch to the B position. X Pull the light switch out to the second stop. The † yellow indicator lamp next to the light switch lights up. X To switch off the front foglamps/rear foglamp: push in the light switch to the stop. The corresponding indicator lamp goes out. i When the light switch is set to U you cannot switch on the front or rear foglamps. X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on the front foglamps: turn the light switch to the B or C position. X Pull the light switch out to the first stop. The ¥ green indicator lamp next to the light switch lights up. 93 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 94 Controls Lights Combination switch (turn signals, main-beam headlamps and headlamp flasher) Main-beam headlamps/headlamp flasher Turn signals Headlamp flasher X To switch on: briefly pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow 2. Hazard warning lamps Combination switch 1 Main-beam headlamp 2 Headlamp flasher Combination switch 1 To indicate a right turn 2 To indicate a left turn Main-beam headlamp X Turn the light switch to B or U. X X To switch on: press the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1. The main-beam indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To switch off: move the combination switch back to its normal position. The main-beam indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. To switch on: press the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1 or 2. The corresponding turn signal indicator lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. i If you only wish to indicate a minor change of direction, press the combination switch briefly in the appropriate direction. The corresponding turn signal flashes three times. 94 1 Hazard warning lamp button X To activate: press hazard warning lamp button 1. All turn signals flash. If you now activate a turn signal, only those turn signal lamps on the corresponding side of the vehicle will flash. X To deactivate: press hazard warning lamp button 1. 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 95 Controls Lights Adjusting the headlamp range (vehicles with halogen headlamps) The headlamp range control allows you to adjust the cone of light from the headlamps according to how your vehicle is laden. You can only adjust the headlamp range while the engine is running. Position Load 2 Front and rear seats occupied, boot laden or Driver's seat occupied, boot laden 3 Not required X Turn thumbwheel for headlamp range 1 to the position which corresponds to the load in your vehicle. Headlamp cleaning system* i The headlamps are cleaned automatically 1 Thumbwheel for headlamp range Position Load 0 Front seats occupied 1 Front and rear seats occupied if the "Wipe with windscreen washer fluid" function is operated five times while the lights are on and the engine is running. When you switch off the ignition, the automatic headlamp cleaning system is reset and counting is resumed from 0. Cornering light function (vehicles with bi-xenon headlamps*) Specially designed headlamps light up the area into which you are driving when turning corners. If you are driving at speeds below 40 km/h, the cornering light function is activated either by the turn signals or when the steering wheel is turned. If you are driving at speeds above 40 km/h the cornering light function is deactivated. Switching on X Make sure that the engine is running. X Switch on the dipped-beam headlamps. X Switch off the fog lights. X Switch on the turn signal. The cornering light on the same side as the turn signal comes on, even if you turn the steering wheel in the opposite direction after indicating. or X * optional Turn the steering wheel in the desired direction. When in a forwards gear: the cornering lamp on the inside of the bend comes on. 95 Z 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 96 Controls Lights When in reverse gear: the cornering light on the outside of the bend comes on. Interior lighting Front overhead control panel Automatic function X To switch on/off: press the ¡ button. Switching off The interior lighting switches on if it is dark when you: X Runlock Switch off the turn signal. i The cornering light is activated until you turn the steering wheel back to the straightahead position and the turn signal switches off. The cornering light may remain lit for a short time, but no more than three minutes. It then goes out, even if the turn signal is still switched on. a door Ropen the boot Rremove the key from the ignition lock The interior lighting switches off after a delay. You can set the delayed switch-off using the on-board computer. Front overhead control panel 1 X To switch the left-hand reading lamp on/off 2 ò To switch the rear interior lighting on/off 3 ¡ To switch the automatic function on/off 4 X To switch the right-hand reading lamp on/off 5 ð To switch the front interior lighting on/off 96 the vehicle Ropen i If the door is left open, the interior lighting goes out after approximately five minutes. Manual control Front interior lighting X To switch on/off: press the ð button. Rear interior lighting X To switch on/off: press the ¦ button. Front reading lamps X To switch on/off: press the X button. 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 97 Controls Windscreen wipers Rear-compartment overhead control panel Windscreen wipers u Continuous wipe, slow t Continuous wipe, fast ! If the windscreen becomes dirty in dry weather conditions, the windscreen wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could then damage the windscreen wiper blades or scratch the windscreen. For this reason, you should always switch off the windscreen wipers in dry weather. Rear-compartment overhead control panel 1 X To switch the left-hand reading lamp on/off 2 X To switch the right-hand reading lamp on/off Rear-compartment reading lamps X To switch on/off: press the X button. Combination switch 1 To switch on the windscreen wipers 2 Single wipe/to wipe the windscreen using washer fluid X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. The various wiper settings can be selected as follows: Settings: M Windscreen wipers off U Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set to low sensitivity) V Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor set to high sensitivity) 97 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 98 Controls Side windows Single wipe X Briefly press the combination switch to the pressure point in the direction of arrow 2. Wiping with washer fluid X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow 2. Intermittent wipe/rain sensor X Turn the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1 to position U or V. The rain sensor is activated. The appropriate wiping frequency is set automatically according to the intensity of the rain. Continuous wipe X Depending on the intensity of the rain, turn the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1 to position u or t. Switching off the windscreen wipers X Turn the combination switch to position M. Side windows Opening/closing the side windows G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped between the side window and the door frame as a side window is opened. Do not touch or lean against the side window during the opening procedure. You could become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the window moves down. If danger threatens, release the switch or pull the switch upwards to close the side window again. G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped as you close a side window. If danger threatens, release the switch or press the switch a second time to open the side window again. G Risk of injury Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only leave it for a short time. 98 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 99 Controls Side windows G Risk of injury Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system. The children could: Rbe seriously or even fatally injured on parts of the vehicle You can disable the controls for the rear side windows from the driver's seat (Y page 49). driver's or front-passenger door is opened, but for no more than five minutes. X To open or close: press the switch down or pull it up beyond the pressure point and hold it until the corresponding window is in the desired position. Rbe seriously or even fatally injured by prolonged exposure to extremely high or extremely low temperatures X To open or close fully: press the switch down or pull it up beyond the pressure point and release it. If children open a door, they could: Rseriously or even fatally injure other people X To stop: briefly press the switch down or pull it up. The switches for all side windows are located on the driver's door. There is also a switch on each door for the respective window. Closing with increased force and without the anti-entrapment feature Rget out of the vehicle, thereby injuring themselves or be seriously or even fatally injured by a passing vehicle Activate the child-proof locks if children are travelling in the vehicle. They could otherwise open doors or windows while the vehicle is in motion and thereby injure themselves or others. i It is also possible to open and close the side windows from the outside using the "Summer opening" (Y page 100) and "Convenience closing" (Y page 100) features respectively. G Risk of injury Switches on the driver's door 1 Front left 2 Front right 3 Rear right 4 Rear left X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. i When the key is turned to position 0 or removed from the ignition lock, it is still possible to operate the windows until the Make sure that nobody can become trapped and a serious or even fatal injury is not caused as you close a side window with increased force or without the anti-entrapment feature. If a side window locks up during closing and has reopened again slightly: X Immediately after the window locks up, pull the switch upwards until the window is fully closed. The side window is closed with more force. 99 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 100 Controls Side windows If a side window locks up again during closing and has reopened again slightly: X Immediately after the window locks up, pull the switch upwards until the window is fully closed. The side window is closed without the antientrapment feature. X You can ventilate the vehicle before a journey. To do this, you can use the key to simultaneously: Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle. X Unlock the vehicle by pressing the k button. Ropen the side windows X Ropen the sliding/tilting sunroof* Keep the k button pressed until the side windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* are in the desired position. Summer opening RSwitch Resetting the windows Each side window must be reset if the battery was disconnected or discharged. X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Pull the switch upwards until the window is closed, and hold it in this position for another second. on the seat ventilation* i The "Summer opening" feature can only be operated via the key. Convenience closing When you lock the vehicle, you can close the side windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* simultaneously. G Risk of injury Make sure nobody is trapped when using the Convenience closing feature. Proceed as follows if there is a risk of entrapment: With the key: RRelease the j button. RPress and hold the k button until the side windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* open again. 100 * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 101 Controls Driving and parking With KEYLESS GO* RRelease X the locking button on the door handle. RPull the door handle immediately and hold it. The side windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* open. X Keep the button pressed until the side windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* are fully closed. Driving and parking Make sure that all the side windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* are closed. G Risk of accident With KEYLESS GO*: With the key Starting the engine Do not keep any objects in the driver's footwell. If you use a floormat or carpet in the driver's footwell, make sure that they are correctly secured and that there is sufficient clearance for the pedals. Objects could otherwise get between the pedals in the event of sudden braking or acceleration. You may then no longer be able to brake, change gear or accelerate as intended. This may result in an accident and injury. G Risk of poisoning 1 Locking button on the door handle X X Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle. Lock the vehicle with the j button. X Keep locking button 1 on the door handle pressed until the side windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* are fully closed. X Make sure that all the side windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* are closed. Never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide. Inhaling exhaust fumes constitutes a health hazard and could lead to loss of consciousness or even death. ! Do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. i If you depress the brake when starting the engine, pedal travel will be unusually long and there will be less pedal resistance. * optional 101 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 102 Controls Driving and parking Automatic transmission P R N D Park position with selector lever lock Reverse gear Neutral Drive position X Before starting, make sure P is selected. release it immediately. The engine then starts automatically. X To start a petrol engine: turn the key to position 3 in the ignition lock (Y page 74) and release it. The engine starts automatically. X To start a diesel engine: turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 74). The q preglow indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X When the q preglow indicator lamp goes out, turn the key to position 3 (Y page 74) and release it. The engine starts automatically. Further information about the automatic transmission (Y page 104). Starting the engine with the key i Vehicles with automatic transmission: You can also use the "touch-start" function. To do this, turn the key to position 3 and 102 The KEYLESS GO button can be used to start the vehicle without inserting the key in the ignition lock. The KEYLESS GO button is on the selector lever. i You can start the engine without preglow if the engine is warm. 1 KEYLESS GO button i The engine can also be started when the selector lever is in position N. even if you are only leaving it for a short time. Starting the engine with KEYLESS GO* G Risk of injury Your vehicle can be started using a valid KEYLESS GO key*. For this reason, children should never be left unsupervised in the vehicle. Always take the KEYLESS GO key* with you when leaving the vehicle, * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 103 Controls Driving and parking X Depress the brake pedal. The selector lever lock is released. X Petrol engine: press KEYLESS GO button 1 once. The engine starts automatically. X Do not drive at high engine speeds until the engine has warmed up. This will protect the engine. i The vehicle will lock itself centrally once you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. You can open the doors from the inside at any time. You can also deactivate the automatic locking feature (Y page 127). Diesel engine: press KEYLESS GO button 1 once. Preglow is activated and the engine starts automatically. i You can start the engine without preglow if the engine is warm: X Press and hold KEYLESS GO button 1 until the engine is running. Pulling away ! AMG vehicles: at low engine temperatures (below + 20° C), the maximum engine speed is limited in order to protect the engine. Avoid driving at full throttle when the engine is cold in order to protect the engine and avoid inconveniences. ! Do not select reverse gear unless the vehicle is stationary, otherwise the transmission will be damaged. i It is only possible to move the selector lever to the desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only then is the selector lever lock released. X Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. X Pull the parking brake release handle to release the parking brake. X Move the selector lever to position D or R. catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature more quickly. Parking G Risk of accident Only remove the key from the ignition lock when the vehicle is stationary since you cannot steer the vehicle with the key removed. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could release the parking brake. This could lead to a serious or fatal accident. G Risk of fire Make sure that the exhaust system does not under any circumstances come into contact with easily ignitable material such as dry grass or petrol. The material could otherwise ignite and set the vehicle on fire. i Wait for the shift process to complete before pulling away. X Release the brake pedal. X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. i Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds after a cold start. This helps the 103 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 104 Controls Transmission Parking brake Stopping the engine Transmission G Risk of accident G Risk of accident If the engine is not running, there is no power assistance for the steering and brakes. Steering and braking then takes much more effort. As a result, you might lose control of the vehicle, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Do not switch off the engine while driving. 1 Release handle 2 Parking brake X To release: depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Pull release handle 1. X The 3 indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X To apply: depress parking brake 2 firmly. The 3 indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up if the engine is running. X The movement of the pedals must not be impaired in any way. Do not keep any objects in the driver's footwell. Make sure that there is sufficient clearance around the pedals when floormats or carpets are used. Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. Move the selector lever to P. With the key X Turn the key to position 0 (Y page 74) in the ignition lock and remove it. The immobiliser is activated. Automatic transmission With KEYLESS GO* X Press and hold the KEYLESS GO button (Y page 74). The engine stops and all the lamps in the instrument cluster go out (Y page 26). i On steep slopes, turn the front wheels towards the kerb. 104 * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 105 Controls Transmission Selector lever positions ì ë Neutral Releasing the brakes will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it. Do not move the selector lever to N while you are driving. The automatic transmission could otherwise be damaged. If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: only move the selector lever to N if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads. ê Drive The automatic transmission changes gear automatically. All forward gears are available. Park position Prevents the vehicle from rolling away when stopped. Only move the selector lever to P when the vehicle is stationary. i The key can only be removed when the selector lever is in position P. If the key is removed from the ignition lock, the selector lever is locked in position P. 1 Selector lever position 2 Gearshift program (S/C) or (S/C/M)* The current shift range and gearshift program (S/C) or (S/C/M)* appear in the display of the speedometer. When the selector lever is in position D, you can influence the gearshifts made by the automatic transmission by: Rrestricting the shift range Rchange * optional gear yourself í Reverse gear Only move the selector lever to R when the vehicle is stationary. One-touch gearshifting When the selector lever is in position D, you can perform gearshifts yourself, even on vehicles with automatic transmission. X To shift up: briefly press the selector lever to the right towards D+. The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear, depending on the gearshift pro- 105 Z 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 106 Controls Transmission gram selected. This also extends the shift range. X To shift down: briefly press the selector lever to the left towards D–. The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear, depending on the gear currently selected. This also restricts the shift range. i To prevent the engine from overrevving, the automatic transmission does not shift down if you push the selector lever towards D– while driving at too high a speed. X X To derestrict the shift range: press and hold the selector lever towards D+ until D is shown once more in the display. The automatic transmission shifts from the current shift range directly to D. To select the most effective shift range: press and hold the selector lever to the left towards D–. The automatic transmission will shift to a range which allows ideal acceleration and deceleration. To do this, the automatic transmission will shift down one or more gears. 106 Shift ranges When the selector lever is in position D, it is possible to restrict or derestrict the shift range for the automatic transmission. X Briefly press the selector lever to the right towards D+ or to the left towards D–. The shift range selected is shown in the speedometer display. The automatic transmission shifts only as far as the selected gear. i If the maximum engine speed for the shift range is reached and you continue to accelerate, the automatic transmission shifts up in order to avoid engine overrev even if the shift range is restricted. ç æ To use the braking effect of the engine on downhill gradients and for driving: Ron steep mountain roads Rin mountainous terrain Rin arduous conditions To use the braking effect of the engine on extremely steep downhill gradients and long downhill stretches. Program selector button Driving situation è The braking effect of the engine can be used in this position. 1 Program selector button 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 107 Controls Transmission S Sport For all normal driving conditions C Comfort For comfort mode ! Only press program selector button 1 when the selector lever is in position P, N or D. X Press program selector button 1 repeatedly until the letter (C/S) for the desired gearshift program appears in the speedometer display. Comfort mode C is characterised by the following: Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in forward and reverse gears, unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully. Ran increase in traction. This improves the driving stability of the vehicle on slippery road surfaces, for example. Rthe automatic transmission shifting up sooner. The vehicle is driven at lower engine speeds and the wheels are less likely to spin. * optional Driving tips Accelerator pedal position Your style of driving influences how the automatic transmission shifts gear: Rlittle throttle: early upshifts Rmore throttle: late upshifts Steering wheel gearshift paddles* and manual gearshift program* Steering wheel gearshift paddles It is possible to shift gear using either the steering wheel gearshift paddles or the selector lever. Kickdown Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Ease off on the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached. The automatic transmission shifts back up. 1 Left-hand paddle: to shift down 2 Right-hand paddle: to shift up Upshifting X Pull right-hand paddle 2. The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. If you are not driving in manual gearshift program M, then the shift range will be extended. 107 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 108 Controls Transmission Downshifting G Risk of accident Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. X shift paddles or the selector lever. The manual gearshift program M can be selected using the program selector button. N or R, you cannot change gear using the steering wheel gearshift paddles. If the manual gearshift program M has been selected and you restart the engine, the automatic transmission will switch to an automatic gearshift program. If the automatic gearshift program S or C has been selected, the automatic transmission will resume the relevant gearshift program when you restart the engine. Manual gearshift program In the manual gearshift program M, you can change gear using the steering wheel gear- 108 To deactivate: press program selector button 1 repeatedly until S or C appears in the display. Upshifting X Briefly press the selector lever to the right towards D+ Pull left-hand paddle 1. The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. If you are not driving in manual gearshift program M, the shift range will be restricted. i When the selector lever is in position P, X or X 1 Program selector button S Sport For all normal driving conditions C Comfort For comfort mode M Manual For manual gearshifting X Vehicles with AMG engines ! In manual gearshift program M, the auto- matic transmission does not shift up automatically even when the limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. You must make sure that the engine speed does not reach the red area of the rev counter. There is otherwise a risk of engine damage. To activate: press program selector button 1 repeatedly until M appears in the display. If the selector lever is in position D, you can shift up or down through the gears. The gear currently selected and engaged is shown in the display. Pull the right-hand paddle on the steering wheel (Y page 107). The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. X Shift up a gear when the ^ upshift symbol appears in the display instead of M. 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 109 Controls Instrument cluster When the AMG display is switched on, the display colour changes to red and UP appears next to the gear indicator, instructing you to shift up. Kickdown Instrument cluster i It is not possible to use kickdown in the Points to remember Downshifting You can also use kickdown for maximum acceleration in manual gearshift program M. X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. G Risk of accident Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. X Briefly press the selector lever to the left towards D- or X Pull the left-hand paddle on the steering wheel (Y page 107). The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. i For maximum acceleration, pull the lefthand gearshift paddle until the transmission selects the optimum gear depending on the speed. manual gearshift program M on vehicles with AMG engines. i It is not possible to shift gears using the steering wheel gearshift paddles during kickdown. You will find a full overview of the instrument cluster in the "At a glance" section (Y page 26). G Risk of accident No further messages can be displayed if there is a malfunction in the instrument cluster and/or the multi-function display. This means that you will not see information about the driving situation, such as the speed, outside temperature, warning/indicator lamps, display messages or system failures. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. Adjust your driving style and speed accordingly. Immediately consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safetyrelated systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. 109 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 110 Controls Instrument cluster Activating the multi-function display X Switch on the ignition. Adjusting the instrument cluster lighting X Brighter or dimmer: turn reset button 1 clockwise or anti-clockwise. i The instrument lighting automatically adjusts in accordance with the ambient light conditions. Coolant temperature gauge 1 Reset button The multi-function display also switches on when you Rpress reset button 1 Ropen a door Rswitch 110 on the lights The coolant temperature gauge is in the instrument cluster on the right-hand side. Under normal operating conditions and with the specified concentration of antifreeze/ corrosion inhibitor, the coolant temperature may rise to 120 † The coolant temperature may rise to the top end of the scale at high outside temperatures and on long uphill stretches. Resetting the trip meter X Select the standard display menu (Y page 115). X Press and hold reset button 1 until the trip meter is reset. Speedometer with segments The segments in the speedometer indicate which speed range is available. Cruise control mode: The segments light up from the stored speed to the maximum speed. Distronic* mode: One or two segments around the stored speed light up. Variable Speedtronic mode: The segments light up from the start of the scale to the selected limit speed. * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 111 Controls On-board computer Rev counter The red band in the rev counter indicates the engine's overrevving range. The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine when the red band is reached. ! Do not drive in the overrevving range. Doing so will damage the engine. H Environmental note Avoid driving at high engine speeds, as this increases your vehicle's consumption unnecessarily and pollutes the environment through increased emissions. Outside temperature display G Risk of accident The road surface may be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges, even if temperatures are just above freezing point. The vehicle could skid if you fail to adapt your driving style. You should therefore always adapt your driving style and speed to suit the weather conditions. On-board computer Points to remember The on-board computer is activated as soon as the key is turned to position 1 in the ignition lock. You can use the on-board computer to call up information relating to your vehicle and to make and adjust settings. You can call up the next service due date, select the display language for the instrument cluster and set other functions. Multi-function steering wheel You can control the multi-function display and the settings in the on-board computer with the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. G Risk of accident Only use the on-board computer when road and traffic conditions permit. You would otherwise be distracted and unable to concentrate properly on driving, and could cause an accident. The on-board computer shows information in the multi-function display. There is a short delay before a change in outside temperature is displayed. 111 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 112 Controls On-board computer 1 Multi-function display 2 s Accepts or rejects a call* t æ RSelects submenus in the ç Settings... menu RChanges RAdjusts 3 values the volume è Selecting menus: scrolls forÿ wards or back j Press briefly to scroll back k and forth in a menu. In the Audio/TV*/DVD* menu: selects a stored station, an audio track or a video scene*. In the Telephone* menu: switches to the phone book and selects a name or phone number. j Press and hold in the Audio/ k TV*/DVD* menu: selects the next/previous station or selects an audio track using rapid scrolling. Press and hold in the Telephone* menu: starts rapid scrolling through the telephone book. You can think of the configuration of the menus and the functions within a menu as a circle: X Press the è orÿ button repeatedly to call up individual menus in sequence. X Press the j or k button to call up the functions within a menu. Unlike other menus, the Settings menu contains a number of submenus (Y page 121). The number of menus depends on the equipment in your vehicle. Multi-function display The multi-function display shows you values and settings as well as any display messages that may have been generated. Several functions are combined thematically in the menus. For example, the Audio/TV*/DVD* menu contains functions for operating the radio or DVD player. The functions can be used to either look up information or to change settings for your vehicle. 112 * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 113 Controls On-board computer 2 Status bar with outside temperature or speed (Y page 124) 3 Trip meter 1 Display area for menus or submenus 113 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, Controls On-board computer Menus and submenus 114 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 114 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 115 Controls On-board computer Function 1 Basic display menu (Y page 115) RDigital speedometer12(Y page 116) ROutside temperature12 (Y page 116) RASSYST PLUS service display (Y page 209) RTyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 201) or tyre pressure monitor* (Y page 202) 2 AMG* menu (Y page 116) 3 Audio/TV*/DVD* (Y page 118) menu RRadio station (Y page 119) RAudio drive or media (Y page 119) RTV* (Y RDVD page 119) video* (Y page 120) 4 Navigation* menu (Y page 120) 12 The 13 This Function 5 Distronic* menu (distance display) (Y page 135) 6 Message memory menu13 (fault and warning messages) (Y page 121) 7 Settings menu (Y page 121) RResetting to factory settings (Y page 121) RSelecting a submenu (Y page 122) 8 Trip computer menu RConsumption statistics (Y page 130) RRange (Y The Audio, Navi* and Tel* menus are displayed slightly differently in vehicles with audio equipment and vehicles with COMAND APS*. The examples given in this Owner's Manual apply to vehicles equipped with COMAND APS*. Standard display menu i Menu overview: see (Y page 114). Use the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. X Press the è or · button to select the standard display. page 130) 9 Telephone* menu (Y page 130) This is what the displays look like when you scroll through the menus. The generic terms in the table overview are intended to help you navigate through the menus. The terms themselves are not always displayed in the multi-function display. Standard display 1 Outside temperature 2 Trip meter sequence of the digital speedometer and the outside temperature display depends on the settings in the "Basic display" submenu. menu is only visible if there is a display message available. * optional 115 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 116 Controls On-board computer Instead of outside temperature 1, you can opt to display the digital speedometer14 (Y page 124). You can select the following functions in the Basic display menu by pressing the j or k button: Rdigital speedometer15 RASSYST PLUS service display (Y page 209) Routside temperature 15 Rtyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 201) or tyre pressure monitor* (Y page 202) Displaying the digital speedometer or outside temperature You can use the Basic display submenu (Y page 124) to select whether the first function listed in the Basic display menu is the digital speedometer or the outside temperature. X Press the j or k button to select the digital speedometer or the outside temperature. Example illustration showing the digital speedometer displayed 1 Digital speedometer 2 Status line with outside temperature 3 Trip meter AMG* menu These functions are only available on AMG vehicles. i Menu overview: see (Y page 114). Use the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. X Press the è or · button to select the AMG menu. 1 Gear indicator 2 Upshift instruction 3 Engine oil temperature In the manual gearshift program, the menu is displayed in red when the engine reaches the overrevving range. You will also see shift up instruction 2. The shift up instruction is the only thing shown in the multi-function display until you shift gear. The engine oil temperature gauge flashes if the engine oil temperature has not reached 80 †. Avoid driving at full engine output during this time. Displaying the on-board voltage X Press the j button repeatedly until the on-board voltage appears. 14 Vehicles 15 The 116 for the United Kingdom: the outside temperature is always displayed. sequence of the digital speedometer and the outside temperature display depends on the settings in the "Basic display" submenu. * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 117 Controls On-board computer 3 Lap 1 Gear indicator 2 On-board voltage You can start the RACETIMER when the engine is running or if the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X To start: press the æ button to start the RACETIMER. X To display the intermediate time: press the ç button to show the intermediate time. The intermediate time is displayed for five seconds. X To stop: press the æ button to stop the RACETIMER. RACETIMER The RACETIMER allows time measurements to be saved. While you have the RACETIMER displayed, you will not be able to adjust the volume using the æ and ç buttons. X Press the j button repeatedly until the RACETIMER appears. The RACETIMER interrupts timing when you stop the vehicle and turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. When you turn the key to position 2 or 3 and then press the æ button, timing is continued. Storing the lap time and starting a new lap It is possible to store a maximum of nine laps. X Press the ç button to show the intermediate time during timing. The intermediate time is displayed for five seconds. X Press the ç button again within 5 seconds. The displayed intermediate time is stored as a lap time. Timing starts for a new lap. The new lap is timed from when the intermediate time is called up. 1 Gear indicator 2 RACETIMER 3 Fastest lap time (best lap) 4 Lap 1 Gear indicator 2 RACETIMER 117 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 118 Controls On-board computer Resetting the current lap X Press the æ button to stop the RACETIMER. X Press the ç button to reset the lap time to "0". Deleting all laps If you have switched off the engine, the RACETIMER is reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are deleted. It is not possible to delete a single stored lap on its own. X Press the æ button to stop the RACETIMER. 1 RACETIMER overall evaluation 2 Total time driven 1 Lap 2 Lap time 3 Top speed 4 Distance covered 3 Top speed 4 Lap length 5 Average speed 5 Average lap speed X Press the reset button on the left of the instrument cluster twice. X Press the æ button to start the RACETIMER. All laps are deleted. This function is only available if you have stored at least two laps and have stopped the RACETIMER. X Press the j button repeatedly until a lap evaluation appears. Each lap is shown in a separate submenu. You are able to see the fastest lap by flashing symbol 1. Overall evaluation This function is only available if you have stored at least one lap and have stopped the RACETIMER. X Press the j button repeatedly until the overall evaluation appears. 118 Lap evaluation X Press the j or k button to select a different lap evaluation. Audio/TV*/DVD* menu Use the functions in the Audio/TV/DVD menu to operate the audio equipment or COMAND APS*. If the audio equipment or COMAND APS* is switched off, the multifunction display shows the Audio off message. i Menu overview: see (Y page 114). Use the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 119 Controls On-board computer X Use the è or · button to select the Audio/TV/DVD menu. or medium (see the separate operating instructions). X To select next or previous track: briefly press the j or k button. X To select a track from the track list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the j or k button. Selecting a radio station You can only store new stations using the audio system or COMAND APS*. Please refer to the separate operating instructions for notes on how to do this. X Switch on the audio equipment or COMAND APS* and select Radio (see the separate operating instructions). X To select a stored station: briefly press the j or k button. X To select a channel from the channel list: press and hold the j or k button. X To select a station using the station search (only if no station list is being received): press and hold the j or k button. 16 Only 1 Waveband (preset number, only if the channel is stored) 2 Station i DAB* radio mode16 (Digital Audio Broadcasting) – see the separate operating instructions. Operating the audio player or audio media* Example 1 Current CD (for CD/DVD changer*) Audio data from different audio players or media can be played back depending on the equipment fitted in the vehicle. X Switch on the audio equipment or COMAND APS* and select the audio player 2 Current track In audio AUX mode, the current track is not displayed. Operating the TV* X Switch on COMAND and select TV (see the separate operating instructions). X To select a stored station: briefly press the j or k button. for certain countries. * optional 119 Z 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 120 Controls On-board computer X X Route guidance inactive To select a channel from the channel list: press and hold the j or k button. To select a channel with the channel search (only if COMAND is not receiving a channel list): press and hold the j or k button. The multi-function display shows the direction of travel and the street name, if it is known to the system. 1 Disc number (only for DVD changer*) 2 Current scene Navigation* menu 1 Function (preset number, only if the chan- nel is stored) 2 Current channel Operating the DVD video* X Switch on COMAND and select DVD video (see the separate operating instructions). X Press the j or k button to select a scene. 120 In the Navigation menu, the multi-function display shows information from the navigation system. i Menu overview: see (Y page 114). Use the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. X Switch on the audio equipment or COMAND APS* (see the separate operating instructions). X 1 Direction of travel 2 Street name Route guidance active The following may appear in the multi-function display: Press the è or · button to select the Navigation menu. * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 121 Controls On-board computer Distronic* menu You can read the current Distronic settings in the Distronic menu. (Y page 135) i Menu overview: see (Y page 114). Message memory menu Previous display messages can be called up in the Message memory menu. You will only see the Message memory menu if there are any display messages. G Risk of accident The on-board computer only records and displays messages and warnings from certain systems. For this reason, you should always make sure that your vehicle is safe to drive. You could otherwise cause an accident by driving an unsafe vehicle. Switching off the ignition clears the Message memory except for the highest priority display messages. The on-board computer will delete these display messages only after the reason for the message has been rectified. i Menu overview: see (Y page 114). Displaying messages Settings menu Use the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. X Press the è or · button repeatedly until either the original menu or the Message memory menu appears. If the Message memory menu does not appear, there are no display messages. If there are messages, the following message may appear in the multi-function display, for example: 2 messages. There are two functions in the Settings... menu: the To reset: Press reset button for 3 seconds function, which you can use to reset most settings to the factory settings. There are also submenus in which you can make individual settings for your vehicle. X Resetting to factory settings Press the j or k button to call up a display message. You can scroll through the display messages in sequence. The possible display messages are explained in the "Practical advice" section (Y page 219). i Menu overview: see (Y page 114). Use the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. For safety reasons, not all functions are reset: permanent Speedtronic can only be set in the Vehicle menu. The Headlamp mode function in the Lighting submenu is only reset if the vehicle is stationary. X Press the è or · button to select the Settings... menu. X Press and hold the reset button on the lefthand side of the instrument cluster for approximately three seconds. A prompt appears in the multi-function display asking you to press the reset button again to confirm. Z * optional 121 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 122 Controls On-board computer X Press the reset button again. The functions of most submenus are restored to the factory settings. Instrument cluster submenu RUnit of measurement for distance (Y page 123) or X If you want to retain the settings, do not press the reset button a second time. After approximately 5 seconds, the Settings... menu appears again. Submenus in the Settings menu X X Press è or · to select the Settings menu. Press the j button to call up the selection of submenus. You will see the selection of submenus. There are more submenus available than are simultaneously displayed. RLanguage (Y RStatus X Press the æ or ç button to select a submenu. The selected submenu is highlighted. X Press the j button to select a function within a submenu. X Press the æ or ç button to change the setting. The changed setting is stored. X Press the è or ÿ button to select a different display. The following tables show the settings you can make in the individual submenus. You will find additional information on the pages shown. page 123) line display (Y page 124) RBasic display (standard display) (Y page 124) Time/date submenu17 RSetting the date and time(Y page 124) Lighting submenu RConstant headlamp mode (Y page 125) RSurround lighting (Y page 125) RAmbient lighting (Y page 126) RExterior lighting delayed switch-off (Y page 126) RInterior lighting delayed switch-off (Y page 126) 17 This 122 function is not available on vehicles with Audio 50 APS*, Audio 55 APS* or COMAND APS*. * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 123 Controls On-board computer Vehicle submenu RPermanent RAutomatic Speedtronic (Y page 144) locking feature (Y page 127) Selecting the unit of measurement for distance The selected unit of measurement for distance applies to: X Press the æ or ç button to select km (kilometres) or miles as the unit of measurement for distance. X Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. Rthe Heater* submenu RSelecting the switch-on time for the auxiliary heating* (Y page 127) RChanging the switch-on time for the aux- iliary heating* (Y page 128) Convenience submenu* REasy-entry/exit feature* (Y page 128) in mirrors when locking the vehicle* (Y page 128) total distance recorder and the trip meter Rthe trip computer Selecting the language Rthe digital speedometer18 X Press the è or · button to select the Settings... menu. X Press the j button to call up the selection of submenus. X Press the æ or ç button to select the Inst. cluster submenu. X Press the j button to select Language. X Press the æ or ç button to select a language: RDeutsch Rcruise RSpeedtronic RDistronic* X Press the è or · button to select the Settings... menu. X Press the j button to call up the selection of submenus. X Press the æ or ç button to select the Inst. cluster submenu. X Press the j button to select Display unit Speed-/odometer. RFold Dynamic driving seat* submenu control RSettings for the driver's and frontpassenger seat (Y page 129) REnglish RFrançais RItaliano REspañol RNederlands 18 Vehicles Z for the United Kingdom: the digital speedometer always displays km/h. * optional 123 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 124 Controls On-board computer RDansk RSvenska RPortuguês RTürkçe RРусский X Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. Selecting the status line display Vehicles for the United Kingdom: this function is not available. X Press the è or · button to select the Settings... menu. X Press the j button to call up the selection of submenus. X Press æ or ç to select the Inst. cluster submenu. X Press the j button to select Status line display. X Press the æ or ç button to select the display in the status line: outside temperature (Outside temp.) or speed (Speed). X Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. 124 Selecting the basic display (standard display) Vehicles for the United Kingdom: this function is not available. You will see either the outside temperature or the digital speedometer first in the Basic display depending on the setting. You will see the display that is not selected when you scroll through the Basic display menu (Y page 115). X Press the è or · button to select the Settings... menu. X Press the j button to call up the selection of submenus. X Press the æ or ç button to select the Inst. cluster submenu. X Press the j button to select Basic display. X Press the æ or ç button to select the basic display: outside temperature (Outside temp.) or speed (Speed). X Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. Setting the date and time Your vehicle could have the following audio equipment: A: Audio 20 or Audio 25* B: Audio 50 APS* or Audio 55 APS* C: COMAND APS* X Refer to the separate operating instructions to find out which audio system is fitted in your vehicle. Depending on the audio system, the time and date are received from GPS satellites and therefore cannot be set using the on-board computer. See the following table. A B C Set using on-board computer Automatic GPS satellite reception X X X * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 125 Controls On-board computer X Press the è or · button to select the Settings... menu. X Press the j button to call up the selection of submenus. X Press the æ or ç button to select the Time/Date submenu. Setting the time X Use j to select Clock, hours Confirm by press. R (or Clock, minutes Confirm by press. R). X Press the æ or ç button to set a value. X Press the reset button on the left of the instrument cluster. The set time is stored. Setting the date X Press the j button to select Set date Day (or Set date Month or Set date Year). X Press the æ or ç button to set the values. X Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. * optional Setting constant headlamp mode If you have set constant headlamp mode and the light switch is in position M orU, the side lamps, dipped-beam headlamps and licence plate lighting are switched on automatically when the engine is running. Turning the light switch to a different position switches on the corresponding lights. For safety reasons, it is only possible to set this function when the vehicle is stationary. In countries in which constant headlamp mode is a legal requirement, Constant is the factory setting. X Press the è or · button to select the Settings... menu. Switching the surround lighting on or off If the surround lighting is switched on, the following lights will be switched on automatically in the dark after you have unlocked the vehicle using the key: Rthe side lamps Rthe tail lamps Rthe licence plate lighting Rthe front foglamps Rthe lights* in the exterior mirrors The surround lighting switches off automatically if you open the driver's door or after 40 seconds. X Press the è or · button to select the Settings... menu. X Press the j button to call up the selection of submenus. X Press the æ or ç button to select the Lighting submenu. X X Press the j button to select Headlamp mode. Press the j button to call up the selection of submenus. X X Press the æ or ç button to set the mode for the headlamps to Manual or Constant (constant headlamp mode). Press the æ or ç button to select the Lighting submenu. X Press the j button to select the Surround lighting function. X Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. Z 125 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 126 Controls On-board computer X Press the æ or ç button to switch the Surround lighting function on or off. X Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. Setting the ambient lighting X Press the è or · button to select the Settings... menu. doors are closed when it is dark using the Headlamps delayed switch-off function. If none of the doors are opened after the engine is switched off or if an open door is not closed, the exterior lighting goes out after 60 seconds. When you have set a delayed switch-off time and then switch off the engine, the following remain lit: Rthe side lamps Press the j button to call up the selection of submenus. Rthe tail lamps Rthe licence plate lighting X Press the æ or ç button to select the Lighting submenu. Rthe front foglamps X Press the j button to select Ambient light. Rthe lights* in the exterior mirrors X X Press the æ or ç button to adjust the brightness to any level from 0 (off) to 5 (bright). Press the è or · button to select the Settings... menu. X Press the j button to call up the selection of submenus. X Press the æ or ç button to select the Lighting submenu. X Press the j button to select Headlamps delayed switch-off. X X Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. Activating or deactivating the exterior lighting delayed switch-off You can set whether the exterior lighting should remain on for 15 seconds after the 126 X Press the æ or ç button to activate or deactivate the Headlamps delayed switch-off feature. X Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. To temporarily deactivate the delayed switchoff: X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock and back to position 0. Delayed switch-off is deactivated. It is reactivated as soon as you start the engine again. Activating or deactivating the interior lighting delayed switch-off The Interior lighting delayed switchoff function allows you to set whether the interior lighting should remain on for 10 seconds after the key is removed from the ignition lock when it is dark. X Press the è or · button to select the Settings... menu. X Press the j button to call up the selection of submenus. * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 127 Controls On-board computer X Press the æ or ç button to select the Lighting submenu. X Press the j button to select Automatic door locking. X Press the j button to select Interior lighting delayed switch-off. X Press the æ or ç button to switch the Automatic door locking feature on or off. X Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. X Press the æ or ç button to activate or deactivate the Interior lighting delayed switch-off feature. X Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. Activating/deactivating the automatic door locking feature The Automatic door locking feature allows you to set whether your vehicle will lock centrally from a speed of about 15 km/h upwards. i For more information on the automatic locking feature, see (Y page 69). X X X Press the è or · button to select the Settings... menu. Press the j button to call up the selection of submenus. Press the æ or ç button to select the Vehicle submenu. * optional Selecting the switch-on time for the auxiliary heating* This function is only available if the vehicle has an auxiliary heating system. The Auxiliary heat. function allows you to select three switch-on times. You can set the exact switch-on time using the other functions in the Heater submenu. The auxiliary heating adopts the Thermatic or 4-zone Thermotronic* temperature setting. The minimum and maximum temperature settings for the auxiliary heating are 20 † and 24 † respectively. You can switch off the auxiliary heating by using the remote control or the auxiliary heating button on the centre console. The auxiliary heating is switched off automatically after 50 minutes. This time can be changed. To do this, visit a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G Risk of fire and poisoning The operation of the auxiliary heating produces hot, toxic exhaust fumes. The fuel vapours produced during refuelling could ignite on the hot exhaust system. Do not switch on the auxiliary heating at filling stations or in enclosed spaces, for instance, a garage, if there is no air extraction system. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others. The Auxiliary heat. function can be called up directly. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the button for the auxiliary heating on the centre console (Y page 166). or X Press the è or · button to select the Settings... menu. X Press the j button to call up the selection of submenus. X Press the æ or ç button to select the Heater submenu. 127 Z 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 128 Controls On-board computer X Press the j button to select Auxiliary heat.. X Press the æ or ç button to set the hour. X Press the æ or ç button to select one of the three switch-on times or Timer off (auxiliary heating switched off). When a switch-on time is selected, the yellow indicator lamp lights up in the auxiliary heating button. X Press the j button to select Switch-on time X Set minutes. X Press the æ or ç button to set the minutes. After changing from one menu to another the new time setting is stored. The yellow indicator lamp lights up on the button for the auxiliary heating on the centre console. X Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. X Changing the switch-on time for the auxiliary heating* This function is only displayed if you have selected a switch-on time. Here you can enter the time at which the auxiliary heating is to be switched on. X Press the è or · button to select the Settings... menu. X Press the j button to call up the selection of submenus. X Press the æ or ç button to select the Heater submenu. X Press the j button to select Switch-on time X Set hours. 128 Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. Activating or deactivating the easyentry/exit feature* i For more information on the easy-entry/ exit feature, see (Y page 83). G Risk of injury When the easy-entry/exit feature is active, the steering wheel moves. There is a risk of occupants becoming trapped. Before activating the easy-entry/exit feature, make sure that nobody can become trapped. Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system. The children could open the driver's door and thereby unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit feature and become trapped. X Press the è or · button to select the Settings... menu. X Press the j button to call up the selection of submenus. X Press the æ or ç button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press the j button to select the EASYENTRY system. X Press the æ or ç button to activate or deactivate the EASY-ENTRY system. X Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. Activating or deactivating the fold-in mirrors when locking* function The Fold in mirrors when locking function allows you to determine whether the exterior mirrors should fold in when you lock the vehicle. When you switch on the ignition, the exterior mirrors fold out again. * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 129 Controls On-board computer If you have switched the function on and you fold in the exterior mirrors using the button on the door (Y page 85), they will not fold out automatically. The exterior mirrors can then only be folded out using the button on the door. X Press the è or · button to select the Settings... menu. X Press the j button to call up the selection of submenus. X Press the æ or ç button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press the j button to select Fold in mirrors when locking. X Press the æ or ç button to activate or deactivate the Fold in mirrors when locking feature. X Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. Selecting a setting for the dynamic driving seat* i For more information on the dynamic driving seat, see (Y page 79). * optional X Press the è or · button to select the Settings... menu. X Press the j button to call up the selection of submenus. X Press the æ or ç button to select the Driving dynamics seat adjustment submenu. X Press the j button to select Driving dyn. seat adjust., driver or Driving dyn. seat adjust., front-pass.. X Press the æ or ç button to select the desired seat setting: Gentle for a soft seat setting or Vigorous for a hard seat setting. X Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. Trip computer menu You can use the Trip computer menu to call up or reset statistical data for your vehicle. i You can select km or miles as the unit of measurement for distance (Y page 123). i Menu overview: see (Y page 114). Use the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. X Press the è or · button to select From start. Consumption statistics from start The values refer to the start of the journey. 1 Kilometres 2 Time 3 Average speed 4 Average fuel consumption 129 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 130 Controls On-board computer If the vehicle is parked for more than 4 hours, the From start consumption statistics are reset (key in position 0 of the ignition lock or removed). The values will not be reset if you turn the key to position 1 or 2 during this time. Consumption statistics from the last reset The values refer to the last reset of the function. X Press the j or k button to select From reset. 1 Kilometres 2 Time 3 Average speed 4 Average fuel consumption 130 Resetting the consumption statistics X Press the j or k button to select the function that you wish to reset. X Press and hold the reset button on the left of the instrument cluster until the values are reset to "0". The consumption statistics From reset are reset automatically after 9,999 hours or 99,999 kilometres. Calling up the range X Press the j or k button to select Distance:. The multi-function display shows the estimated distance that can be covered by the vehicle, based on your current driving style and the amount of fuel remaining in the tank. If there is only a small amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows a vehicle being refuelled instead of the range. Telephone menu* Functions and displays are dependent on the optional equipment installed in your vehicle. You can place your mobile phone in the mobile phone cradle* (Y page 183), or set up a Bluetooth connection to the audio system or COMAND APS* see the separate operating instructions. G Risk of accident Observe the legal requirements of the country in which you are currently driving regarding the use of mobile telephones in the vehicle. If it is permitted to use mobile phones while the vehicle is in motion, you should only use them when the road and traffic conditions permit. You may otherwise be distracted from the traffic conditions, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. i Menu overview: see (Y page 114). Use the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 131 Controls On-board computer X X Switch on the mobile phone and audio system or COMAND APS* see the separate operating instructions. Press the è or · button to select the Telephone menu. Accepting a call X If someone calls you while you are in the Telephone menu, the following message appears in the multi-function display: Press the j or k button to call up the phone book. X Press the j or k button to select the desired name. To scroll through the telephone book faster, press and hold the j or k button for longer than 1 second. X Press the s button to start dialling. The Calling ... message appears in the multi-function display. The number dialled is stored in the redial memory. When there is a connection, the call duration appears in the multi-function display. The name also appears, provided it is stored in the phone book, otherwise the dialled number is still displayed. Mobile phone on PIN code not yet entered Once you have inserted the mobile phone into the mobile phone cradle* the multi-function display shows the Please enter PIN:message. X Enter the PIN using the mobile phone, Linguatronic*, the audio systemor COMAND APS*. The mobile phone will search for a network. Mobile phone operational The multi-function display shows the Ready message or the name of the GSM network provider. If the operational readiness symbol goes out, your vehicle is outside the transmission and reception range. * optional Example X Press the s button to accept the call. Rejecting or ending a call X Press the t button. Dialling a number from the phone book If your mobile phone is operational, you can select and dial a number from the phone book at any time. It is only possible to enter new numbers into the phone book using the mobile phone. Please refer to the separate operating instructions for notes on how to do this. or X If you do not wish to make a call, press the t button. Redialling The on-board computer stores the last phone numbers which were dialled. Z 131 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 132 Controls Driving systems X Press the s button to call up the most recently dialled number in the redial memory. X Press the j or k button to select the desired name or number. X Press the s button to start dialling. Driving systems Your vehicle's driving systems are described on the following pages: RCruise control, Distronic* and Speedtronic, which you can use to control the speed of the vehicle RHOLD, which makes pulling away easier, particularly on steep uphill gradients RVehicle level setting and Airmatic DC*, which can be used to adjust your vehicle's chassis RParktronic*, which assists you in parking and manoeuvring The ABS, BAS, adaptive brake lights, ESP®, EBV (electronic brake-power distribution) and ADAPTIVE BRAKE driving safety systems are described in the "Driving safety systems" section (Y page 57). Cruise control Cruise control maintains a constant road speed for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden, you must select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. In this way you will make use of the braking effect of the engine, which relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. G Risk of accident Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. Use cruise control only if road and traffic conditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady speed for a prolonged period. You can store any road speed above 30 km/h. G Risk of accident Cruise control cannot take account of road and traffic conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions even when cruise control is activated. 132 * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 133 Controls Driving systems Cruise control is only an aid designed to assist driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed and for braking in good time. G Risk of accident Do not use cruise control: Rin road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed (e.g. heavy traffic or winding roads). You could otherwise cause an accident. Ron slippery roads. Braking or accelerating could cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow 1 Segments 1 To store the current speed or a higher Cruise control lever 2 LIM indicator lamp 3 To select the current or last stored speed speed You can operate cruise control and variable Speedtronic with the cruise control lever. The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: Cruise control display in the speedometer RLIM When cruise control is activated, you will see the set speed for approximately five seconds in the multi-function display. The segments light up constantly from the set speed to the maximum speed. RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control is selected indicator lamp lit: variable Speedtronic is selected 4 To store the current speed or a lower speed 5 To switch between cruise control and var- iable Speedtronic 6 To deactivate cruise control Selecting cruise control X Check whether LIM indicator lamp 2 is off. If it is off, cruise control is already selected. If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 5. LIM indicator lamp 2 in the cruise control lever goes out. Cruise control is selected. 133 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 134 Controls Driving systems Storing and maintaining the current speed You can store the current speed if you are driving faster than 30 km/h and ESP® is activated (Y page 59). X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. X Briefly press the cruise control lever up 1 or down 4. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is activated. The vehicle automatically maintains the stored speed. i Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Cruise control maintains the stored speed on downhill gradients by automatically applying the brakes. Selecting the current or last stored speed G Risk of accident Only select a stored speed if you know what that speed is and whether it is suitable for 134 the current situation. Otherwise, sudden acceleration or braking could endanger you or others. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you 3. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is activated and adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored. i Deceleration of the vehicle by means of the cruise control lever is assisted by automatic application of the brakes. On long downhill gradients, the automatic transmission shifts down as a further measure. Making fine adjustments in 1 km/h increments X Setting a speed X Press the cruise control lever up 1 for a higher speed or down 4 for a lower speed. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until the desired speed is reached. X Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is stored. i Cruise control is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. For example, if you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. Briefly press the cruise control lever up 1 for a higher speed or down 4 for a lower speed. The last speed stored is increased or reduced. Deactivating cruise control There are several ways to deactivate cruise control: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards 6. or X or Brake. 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 135 Controls Driving systems X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 5. Variable Speedtronic is selected. LIM indicator lamp 2 in the cruise control lever lights up. Cruise control is automatically deactivated if, for example: Ryou depress the parking brake Ryou are driving at less than 30 km/h RESP® (Y page 59) is intervening or you deactivate ESP® Ryou move the selector lever to N while driv- ing If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the Cruise control off message in the multi-function display for approximately five seconds. i The last speed stored is cleared when you switch off the engine. Distronic* Distronic regulates the speed and automatically maintains the distance to the vehicle in front. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden, you must select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. In this way you will make use of the braking effect of the engine, which relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. G Risk of accident Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. G Risk of accident Distronic is only an aid designed to assist driving. The driver remains fully responsible for the vehicle's distance from other vehicles, the vehicle's speed and braking in good time. Distronic does not react to: Rpedestrians Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. sta- tionary or parked vehicles Roncoming and crossing traffic Distronic may not detect narrow vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehicles driving on a different line. Therefore, always pay attention to traffic conditions even when Distronic is activated. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, could cause an accident and injure yourself and others. If a slower-moving vehicle is detected in front, Distronic causes your vehicle to brake and maintain a preset distance to the vehicle in front. G Risk of accident Distronic cannot take account of road and traffic conditions. Deactivate, or do not activate, Distronic in situations in which Distronic maintains the speed or accelerates to the set speed because it has lost the vehicle in front, in particular: Rbefore corners Ron filter lanes Z * optional 135 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 136 Controls Driving systems Rwhen changing to a lane with faster mov- ing traffic Rin complex driving situations or where the lanes are diverted, e.g. in motorway roadworks Distronic cannot take account of weather conditions. Deactivate, or do not activate, Distronic: Rif the roads are slippery, snow-covered or icy. The wheels could lose their grip under braking or acceleration. The vehicle could start to skid. Rif the sensors are dirty or there is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain or fog. Distance control may be impaired. Always pay attention to traffic conditions even when Distronic is activated. You may not otherwise recognise dangers in time, could cause an accident and injure yourself and others. If there is no vehicle in front, Distronic operates in the same way as cruise control. Distronic functions in the 30 km/h to 180 km/ h range. 136 G Risk of accident Distronic brakes your vehicle at a maximum of 2 m/s2 depending on its speed. This corresponds to approximately 20% of your vehicle's maximum braking power. You must also apply the brakes yourself if this braking power is not sufficient to avoid a collision. Cruise control lever With the cruise control lever you can operate Distronic and variable Speedtronic. The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: indicator lamp off: Distronic is selected 1 To store the current speed or a higher speed 2 LIM indicator lamp 3 Selecting the current or last stored speed 4 To store the current speed or a lower speed RLIM 5 To switch between Distronic and variable RLIM 6 Deactivating Distronic indicator lamp lit: variable Speedtronic is selected Speedtronic Selecting Distronic X Check whether LIM indicator lamp 2 is off. If it is off, Distronic is already selected. If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 5. LIM indicator lamp 2 in the cruise control lever goes out. Distronic is selected. 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 137 Controls Driving systems Switching on Distronic, storing the current speed and maintaining it i If you do not fully release the accelerator pedal, the DISTRONIC override message appears in the multi-function display. The distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front will not then be governed. You will be driving at the speed you determine by the position of the accelerator pedal. If Distronic is not activated after the cruise control lever is pressed, you will see the message - - - in the multi-function display. You cannot activate Distronic under the following circumstances: Rif you are driving slower than 30 km/h or faster than 180 km/h Rwhen braking Rwhen you have applied the parking brake RIf ESP® is deactivated Rwhen or N Rfor the selector lever is in position P, R two minutes after the engine is started X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. X Briefly press the cruise control lever up 1 or down 4. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Distronic is activated. The vehicle maintains the stored speed until the distance to the vehicle in front becomes too small. Making adjustments in 1 km/h increments X or X Setting a speed X Press the cruise control lever up 1 for a higher speed or down 4 for a lower speed. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until the desired speed is reached. X Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is stored. i Distronic is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you accelerate briefly to overtake, Distronic adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. i Deceleration of the vehicle by means of the cruise control lever is assisted by automatic application of the brakes. On long downhill gradients, the automatic transmission shifts down as a further measure. For a higher speed: briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you 3. Keep the cruise control lever pulled towards you 3 until the desired speed is reached. Adjustment in 10 km/h increments X Briefly press the cruise control lever up 1 for a higher speed or down 4 for a lower speed. The last speed stored is increased or reduced. Selecting the current or last stored speed G Risk of accident Only select a stored speed if you know what that speed is and whether it is suitable for the current situation. Otherwise, sudden acceleration or braking could endanger you or others. 137 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 138 Controls Driving systems X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you 3. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Distronic is activated and adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored. Setting the specified minimum distance for Distronic You can set the specified minimum distance for Distronic by varying the time span between 1.0 and 2.0 seconds. This time span determines the distance that Distronic should maintain from the vehicle in front, depending on the road speed. You can read this distance in the multi-function display. 2 Indicator lamp 3 To adjust the set distance To adjust the set distance X To increase: turn thumbwheel 3 towards ¯. Distronic then maintains a greater distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. G Risk of accident X Brake or swerve to avoid the obstacle if necessary. To decrease: turn thumbwheel 3 towards ®. Distronic then maintains a shorter distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. mum distance required by law to the vehicle in front. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if necessary. This function warns you when the distance to the vehicle in front is too small, even when Distronic is deactivated: RThe ing function 138 Pay careful attention to the traffic situation if: Rthe l distance warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up Rand/or distance warning lamp l in the instrument cluster lights up. RAn intermittent warning tone may sound. an intermittent signal sounds i Distronic does not always clearly recognise complex road and traffic conditions. You may then receive a false distance warning tone or none at all. i Make sure that you maintain the mini- Distance warning function 1 To activate/deactivate the distance warn- You must apply the brakes yourself in order to maintain the correct distance to the vehicle and to avoid a collision. X To activate/deactivate: press button 1. When the function is activated, indicator lamp2 in the button lights up and a loudspeaker symbol appears in the display. When the function is deactivated, indicator lamp 2 in the button goes out and the loudspeaker symbol disappears from the multi-function display. 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 139 Controls Driving systems Distronic displays in the speedometer you have re-established the required distance to the vehicle in front. i Distronic brakes your vehicle at a maximum of 2 m/s2. This corresponds to approximately 20% of your vehicle's maximum braking power. Distronic menu in the on-board computer 1 Segments 1 Stored speed When Distronic is activated, one or two segments in the set speed range light up. i For design reasons, the speed displayed in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed set for Distronic. If Distronic detects a vehicle in front, the segments between the speed of the vehicle in front and the stored speed light up. The l distance warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up if the distance to the vehicle in front is too small. G Risk of accident If Distronic detects a risk of collision with the vehicle in front: Rthe l distance warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up Ran You can read the current Distronic settings in the Distronic menu. What the multi-function display shows depends on whether Distronic and the distance warning function are activated or deactivated. X Press the è orÿ button repeatedly until one of the following two displays appears in the multi-function display. Distronic deactivated When Distronic is deactivated you will see the standard Distronic display in the multi-function display. intermittent warning signal sounds Brake to avoid crashing. The intermittent warning tone ceases and the l distance warning lamp goes out once Z 139 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 140 Controls Driving systems Deactivating Distronic in the multi-function display for approximately five seconds. The last speed stored is cleared when you switch off the engine. 3 Specified minimum distance to the vehi- cle in front function Distronic activated When Distronic is activated, the stored speed appears in the multi-function display for approximately five seconds. With Distronic activated, you will see the following in the multi-function display: Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 3. Variable Speedtronic is selected. LIM indicator lamp 2 in the cruise control lever lights up. i You will see the Distronic off message 1 Vehicle in front, if detected 2 Actual distance to the vehicle in front 4 Own vehicle 5 Symbol for activated distance warning X 1 To deactivate Distronic 2 LIM indicator lamp 3 To switch between Distronic and variable Speedtronic There are several ways to deactivate Distronic: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards 1. or the accelerator pedal. If you accelerate briefly to overtake, Distronic adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. Distronic is automatically deactivated if: Ryou depress the parking brake Ryou are driving at less than 30 km/h RESP® or X i Distronic is not deactivated if you depress Brake. is intervening or you deactivate ESP® Ryou move the selector lever to N while driv- ing If Distronic is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the Distronic 1 Display for activated Distronic 140 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 141 Controls Driving systems off message in the multi-function display for approximately five seconds. Vehicles travelling on a different line Tips for driving with Distronic Distronic has not detected the vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be too short. Narrow vehicles The following contains descriptions of certain road and traffic conditions in which you must pay particular attention. In such situations, brake if necessary. Distronic is then deactivated. Cornering, going into and coming out of a bend Distronic may not detect vehicles travelling on a different line. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. Other vehicles changing lane Distronic has not detected the vehicle in front on the edge of the carriageway yet, because of its relatively narrow width. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. The ability of Distronic to detect vehicles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late. 141 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 142 Controls Driving systems Speedtronic Speedtronic brakes automatically so that you do not exceed the set speed. On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden, you must select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. In this way you will make use of the braking effect of the engine, which relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If you need additional braking, depress the brake pedal repeatedly rather than continuously. G Risk of accident Never depress the brake pedal continuously while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never cause the brakes to rub by applying constant slight pedal pressure. This causes the brake system to overheat, increases the braking distance and can lead to the brakes failing completely. G Risk of accident Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. You can set a variable or permanent limit speed: RVariable areas RPermanent for long-term speed restrictions, e.g. for driving on winter tyres (Y page 144) indicator lamp lit: variable Speedtronic is selected You can use the cruise control lever to limit the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while the engine is running. G Risk of accident Speedtronic is only an aid designed to assist driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed and for braking in good time. i The speed indicated in the speedometer may differ slightly from the limit speed stored. Variable Speedtronic With the cruise control lever you can operate cruise control, Distronic* and variable Speedtronic. The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: RLIM 142 for speed limits, e.g. in built-up Cruise control or Distronic* is selected RLIM indicator lamp off: 1 To store the current speed or a higher speed 2 LIM indicator lamp 3 To call up the current or last stored speed or to make fine adjustments in 1 km/h increments 4 To store the current speed or a lower speed 5 To switch between cruise control, Distronic* and variable Speedtronic 6 To deactivate variable Speedtronic * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 143 Controls Driving systems Selecting variable Speedtronic Storing the current speed X You can use the cruise control lever to limit the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while the engine is running. X Briefly press the cruise control lever up 1 or down 4. The current speed is stored. The stored speed, e.g. LIM km/h, appears in the multifunction display. The segments in the speedometer from the start of the scale up to the stored speed light up. Check whether LIM indicator lamp 2 is on. If it is on, variable Speedtronic is already selected. If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 5. LIM indicator lamp 2 in the cruise control lever lights up. Variable Speedtronic is selected. G Risk of accident If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the limit speed stored. Only use variable Speedtronic if you are sure that you will not have to accelerate suddenly to a speed above that stored as the limit speed, otherwise you could cause an accident. You can only exceed the limit speed stored if you deactivate variable Speedtronic: Rusing the cruise control lever Rif you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown) It is not possible to deactivate variable Speedtronic by braking. * optional Selecting the current or last stored speed X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you 3. Adjustment in 10 km/h increments X Briefly press the cruise control lever up 1 for a higher speed or down 4 for a lower speed. or X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until the desired speed is set. Press the cruise control lever, up 1 for a higher speed or down 4 for a lower speed. Making fine adjustments in 1 km/h increments X For a higher speed: briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you 3. or X Keep the cruise control lever pulled towards you 3 until the desired speed is set. Deactivating variable Speedtronic There are several ways to deactivate variable Speedtronic: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards 6. or X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 5. LIM indicator lamp 2 in the cruise control lever goes out. Variable Speedtronic is deactivated. Cruise control or Distronic* is selected. 143 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 144 Controls Driving systems Variable Speedtronic is deactivated automatically when you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown). but only if your current speed does not differ by more than 20 km/h from the stored speed. You will hear a warning tone if this is the case. G Risk of accident It is not possible to deactivate variable Speedtronic by braking. Setting permanent Speedtronic X Press è or · to select the Settings... menu (Y page 121). X Press the j button to call up the selection of submenus. X Press æ or ç to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press j to select Speed limit (winter tyres). i The last speed stored is cleared when you switch off the engine. HOLD HOLD relieves the strain on the driver: Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopes Rwhen manoeuvring on steep slopes Rwhen waiting in traffic The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is cancelled and HOLD deactivated when you depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. Permanent Speedtronic Activation conditions i Permanent Speedtronic is only available You can activate HOLD if: for certain countries. You can use the on-board computer to limit the speed permanently to a value between 160 km/h (e.g. for driving with winter tyres) and the maximum speed. Shortly before the stored speed is reached, it is shown in the multi-function display. You cannot exceed the stored limit speed, even if you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown). 144 X Press the æ orç button to select the desired setting. The following settings can be selected: ROff Permanent Speedtronic is deactivated. limit speed between 240 km/h and 160 km/h in increments of 10 km/h. RA X To select a different display, press j, è or ÿ. Rthe vehicle is stationary Rthe engine is running Rthe driver's door is closed Rthe parking brake is not applied Rthe bonnet is closed Rthe selector lever is in position D, R or N 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 145 Controls Driving systems Activating HOLD X Make sure that the activation conditions are met. X Depress the brake. X Depress the brake again quickly until HOLD appears in the display. HOLD is activated. You can release the brake pedal. i If depressing the brake pedal the first time does not activate HOLD, wait briefly and then try again. G Risk of accident The vehicle's brakes are applied when HOLD is activated. For this reason, deactivate HOLD if the vehicle is to be set in motion by other means (e.g. in a car wash or by towing). Deactivating HOLD HOLD is deactivated if: Ryou accelerate when the selector lever is in position D or R Ryou Ryou move the selector lever to position P release the brakes completely and apply them again with a certain amount of pressure until the HOLD message in the multi-function display goes out G Risk of accident You will see a warning message in the multifunction display if HOLD is activated and: Rthe driver's door is opened and you release the seat belt Never get out of the vehicle when HOLD is activated. HOLD must never be operated or deactivated by a passenger or from outside the vehicle. HOLD does not replace the parking brake and must not be used for parking. The HOLD braking effect is cancelled and the vehicle can start moving if: RHOLD is deactivated by depressing the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal A horn will also sound at regular intervals if HOLD is activated and you: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or an Rstop interruption in the power supply, e.g. battery failure Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses are tampered with Rthe battery is disconnected G Risk of accident If you wish to leave the vehicle or park it, deactivate HOLD and secure the vehicle against rolling away. Rthe ignition is switched off Rthe bonnet is opened Selector lever in park position X Move the selector lever to P to prevent the vehicle from rolling away. HOLD is deactivated. The warning message in the multi-function display goes out. the engine and open the driver's door Ropen the bonnet The horn draws your attention to the fact that the vehicle has been parked while HOLD is still activated. The sound becomes louder if you attempt to lock the vehicle. The vehicle is not locked until HOLD is deactivated. i If the ignition has been switched off, the engine cannot be restarted until HOLD is deactivated. If there is a fault in the system or power supply while HOLD is activated, the Brake immediately message appears in the multi-function 145 Z 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 146 Controls Driving systems display. Immediately depress the brake firmly until the warning message disappears from the multi-function display or move the selector lever to P. This deactivates HOLD. AIRMATIC DC* Vehicle level Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride height to reduce petrol consumption and improve driving safety. The following vehicle levels are possible: RNormal RRaised RLowered The "Normal" and "Raised" vehicle levels can be set manually. The "Lowered" vehicle level is set automatically: Rat speeds above 140 km/h Rif you have selected "Sports tuning I or II" (Y page 147) Rif you have selected "Comfort tuning" (Y page 147) and then lock the vehicle 146 within 60 seconds of the engine being switched off tionary. Otherwise, limbs could become trapped. G Risk of injury If you have selected “Comfort tuning”, the vehicle will be lowered if you lock it within 60 seconds of the engine being switched off. Make sure, therefore, that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel housing or under the vehicle when you lock the vehicle. Otherwise, limbs could become trapped. ! If you have selected “Comfort tuning”, the vehicle will be lowered if you lock it within 60 seconds of the engine being switched off. Make sure when parking that you stop your vehicle so that it does not make contact with the kerb as it descends. Your vehicle could otherwise be damaged. Setting the vehicle level manually Select the "Normal" setting for normal road surfaces and "Raised" for driving with snow chains or on particularly poor road surfaces. G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel housing or under the vehicle while lowering the vehicle when it is sta- 1 To set the vehicle level 2 Indicator lamp Setting the raised level X Start the engine. If indicator lamp 2 is not lit: X Press button 1. Indicator lamp 2 lights up. The vehicle is adjusted to the raised level. The Vehicle rising message appears in the multi-function display * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 147 Controls Driving systems Setting the normal level X Start the engine. If indicator lamp 2 is lit: X Press button 1. Indicator lamp 2 goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to the normal level. The damping/spring stiffness settings are dependent on: Ryour Rthe driving style road surface conditions Ryour individual selection Your selection remains stored even if you remove the key from the ignition lock. i The "Raised level" setting is cancelled at vehicle speeds above 120 km/h or if the speed has been between 80 km/h and 120 km/h for more than approximately 5 minutes. If you do not drive within this speed range, the raised level remains stored, even when the key is removed from the ignition lock. Sports tuning II X Press button 1 twice. Two indicator lamps 2 light up. The vehicle level is lowered by 15 mm. Comfort tuning X Press button 1 repeatedly until indicator lamps 2 go out. Multi-function display A message appears in the multi-function display for approximately five seconds once you have selected a damping program, for example: Comfort or sports tuning AIRMATIC DC (dual control) comprises two components: the Adaptive Damping System (ADS) and spring stiffness adjustment. ADS automatically regulates the suspension as appropriate to particular driving conditions. Parallel to this, the spring stiffness switches between "comfort" and "sports" levels. 1 To select the damping program 2 Indicator lamps X Start the engine. Sports tuning I X Press button 1 once. One indicator lamp 2 lights up. The vehicle level is lowered by 10 mm. 147 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 148 Controls Driving systems Parktronic* G Risk of accident Parktronic is only an aid and may not detect all obstacles. It does not relieve you of the responsibility to pay attention. You are always responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your immediate surroundings when parking and manoeuvring. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others. G Risk of injury Make sure that no persons or animals are in the manoeuvring range. Otherwise, they could be injured. Parktronic is an electronic parking aid. It indicates visually and audibly the distance between your vehicle and an object. Parktronic is automatically activated when you switch on the ignition and release the parking brake. Parktronic is deactivated at speeds above 18 km/h. It is reactivated at lower speeds. Parktronic monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper and four sensors in the rear bumper. 148 1 Sensors in the front bumper Side view Range of the sensors The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush, otherwise they may not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. Top view * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 149 Controls Driving systems Front sensors Centre Approximately 100 cm Corners Approximately 60 cm If there is an obstacle within this range, all warning displays light up and a tone sounds. If the distance falls below the minimum clearance, it may no longer be shown. Warning displays Rear sensors Centre Approximately 120 cm Corners Approximately 80 cm ! Pay particular attention to objects above The warning displays show the distance between the sensors and the obstacle. The warning display for the front area is located on the dashboard above the centre air vents. The warning display for the rear area is in the roof trim at the rear. or below the sensors when parking, such as flower pots or trailer towbars. Parktronic does not detect such objects when they are in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the objects. Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, a lorry's compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill could cause Parktronic to malfunction. Minimum distance Centre Approximately 20 cm Corners Approximately 15 cm The warning display for each side of the vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red segments. Parktronic is operational if yellow indicator segments 3 light up. The selector lever position determines which warning display is active: Selector lever at Warning display D Front area activated R or N Rear and front areas activated P No areas activated One or more segments light up as the vehicle approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehicle's distance from the obstacle. From the: Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an intermittent warning tone for approximately two seconds. Front area warning display 1 Left-hand side of the vehicle 2 Right-hand side of the vehicle 3 Indicator segments Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. You have reached the minimum distance. 149 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, Controls Driving systems Deactivating/activating Parktronic 1 To deactivate/activate Parktronic 2 Indicator lamp If indicator lamp 2 is on, Parktronic is deactivated. i Parktronic is automatically activated when you turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. 150 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 150 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 151 Controls Air conditioning Air conditioning Overview of the control panels The vehicle is equipped with one of the following air-conditioning systems: 2-zone Thermatic 4-zone Thermotronic* 2-zone Thermatic is an automatic air-conditioning system combining an automatic heating and ventilation system with a cooling system. 4-zone Thermotronic is a luxury automatic The rear-compartment air conditioning air-conditioning system combining an auto- allows separate temperature settings for the matic heating and ventilation system with a rear compartment. cooling system. You can control the air conditioning separately for each zone in the vehicle. 19 Rear-compartment * optional Rear-compartment air conditioning*19 air conditioning is only available in conjunction with 4-zone Thermotronic. 151 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 152 Controls Air conditioning General notes 2-zone Thermatic controls the temperature of the vehicle interior and filters out undesirable substances from the air. 4-zone Thermotronic* controls the temperature and the humidity of the vehicle interior and filters out undesirable substances from the air. 2-zone Thermatic/4-zone Thermotronic* is only operational when the engine is running. Optimum operation is only achieved when you drive with the side windows and sliding/ tilting sunroof* closed. 152 i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during warm weather, e.g. using the summer opening feature (Y page 100). This will speed up the cooling process and the desired interior temperature will be reached more quickly. i The integrated filter filters out most particles of dust and completely filters out pollen. A clogged filter reduces the amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For this reason, you should always observe the interval for replacing the filter, which is specified in the Service Booklet. As it depends on environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may be shorter than stated in the Service Booklet. G Risk of accident Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. The windows could otherwise mist up. This may obstruct your view of the traffic situation, thereby causing an accident. * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 153 Controls Air conditioning Control panels for Thermatic/4-zone Thermotronic*/rear-compartment air-conditioning* 2-zone Thermatic Function Recommendation/Notes 1 Sets the temperature, left i Set the temperature to 22 †. (Y page 159) 2 y Demists the windscreen i Only use the "demisting" function until the wind- (Y page 163) screen is clear again. 3 Q Increases the airflow * optional (Y page 163) 153 Z 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 154 Controls Air conditioning Function 4 Display 5 © Sets the air distribution 6 ¯ Switches the rear window heating on/off Recommendation/Notes (Y page 162) i At very low temperatures, the rear window heating is (Y page 164) only switched on once the vehicle interior has warmed up. (Y page 159) 7 Sets the temperature, right 8 T Activates/deactivates the auxiliary heating/venti- i You can use the residual heat to heat or ventilate the (Y page 165) vehicle interior after you have switched off the ignition. lation 9 2 Activates/deactivates cooling with air dehumidification a ª Sets the air distribution b ´ Activates/deactivates Thermatic c · Reduces the airflow 154 i Set the temperature to 22 †. i Switch on the air conditioning with air dehumidifica- (Y page 158) tion function. The indicator lamp in the 2 button comes on. (Y page 162) i Activate Thermatic. The display comes on. (Y page 158) (Y page 163) 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 155 Controls Air conditioning d Function Recommendation/Notes , Activates/deactivates Thermatic i Only use this operating mode for a short time, e.g. in (Y page 164) a tunnel. Otherwise, the windows can mist up due to lack of fresh air. e U Controls the air conditioning automatically i Activate automatic air conditioning. AUTO appears in (Y page 159) the display. 4-zone Thermotronic* * optional 155 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 156 Controls Air conditioning Function Recommendation/Notes (Y page 162) 1 Sets the air distribution, left 2 y Activates/deactivates the demisting function for the windscreen i Only use the "demisting" function until the wind- 3 $ Increases the temperature, left-hand side i Set the temperature to 22 †. (Y page 159) 4 Display 5 $ Increases the temperature, right-hand side i Set the temperature to 22 †. (Y page 159) 6 ¯ Switches the rear window heating on/off i At very low temperatures, the rear window heating is (Y page 164) screen is clear again. (Y page 163) only switched on once the vehicle interior has warmed up. (Y page 162) 7 Sets the air distribution, right 8 U Controls the air-conditioning system automatically, i Activate the automatic air conditioning. The indicator (Y page 159) lamp in the U button comes on. right 9 2 Cooling with air dehumidification on/off i Switch on the air conditioning with air dehumidifica- (Y page 158) tion function. The indicator lamp in the 2 button comes on. a 156 % Reduces the temperature, right-hand side i Set the temperature to 22 †. (Y page 159) 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 157 Controls Air conditioning Function Recommendation/Notes b ™ Operates the rear-compartment air conditioning via 4-zone Thermotronic (Y page 160) c Q Increases the airflow (Y page 163) d ´ Activates/deactivates 4-zone Thermotronic e · Reduces the airflow f T Activates/deactivates the auxiliary heating/venti- i You can use the residual heat to heat or ventilate the (Y page 165) vehicle interior after you have switched off the ignition. lation g % Reduces the temperature, left-hand side i Set the temperature to 22 †. h , Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode i Only use this operating mode for a short time, e.g. in (Y page 164) i Activate 4-zone Thermotronic. The display comes on. (Y page 158) (Y page 163) (Y page 159) a tunnel. Otherwise, the windows can mist up due to lack of fresh air. j U Controls the air-conditioning system automatically, i Activate the automatic air conditioning. The indicator (Y page 159) lamp in the U button comes on. left 157 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 158 Controls Air conditioning Rear-compartment air conditioning* Activating/deactivating the control panel i When the air conditioning is switched off, the air supply and air circulation are also switched off. Only select this setting briefly, otherwise the windows may mist up. X X 1 $ To increase the temperature, left 2 Display 3 $ To increase the temperature, right 4 % To reduce the temperature, right 5 % To reduce the temperature, left To activate: press the ´ button. The display comes on. The previously selected settings come into effect again. To deactivate: press the ´ button. The display shows 020/OFF21. i You can also press another button (apart from the ¯ and T buttons) to activate Thermatic. Switching cooling with air-dehumidification on/off The "cooling with dehumidification" function is only available when the engine is running. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected. This prevents the windows from misting up. G Risk of accident If the "cooling with air-dehumidification" function is deactivated, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled (during warm weather) or dehumidified. The windows could mist up more quickly. This may prevent you from observing the traffic conditions, thereby causing an accident. H Environmental note The cooling system uses the refrigerant R134A. This refrigerant does not damage the earth's ozone layer. i Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when Thermatic is in cooling mode. 20 Vehicles 21 Vehicles 158 with 2-zone Thermatic. with 4-zone Thermotronic*. * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 159 Controls Air conditioning X X To switch on: press the œ button. The indicator lamp in the œ button comes on. X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Set the desired temperature. To deactivate: press the œ button. The indicator lamp in the œ button goes out. The cooling with air dehumidification function has a delayed switch-off feature. X To activate: press the U button. The AUTO display for the air distribution and airflow comes on. The indicator lamp22 on the U button lights up. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode. X To deactivate: press the Q or · button. The AUTO display for the airflow goes out. The automatic control is deactivated and the airflow is controlled according to the selected setting. Automatic air distribution remains activated. i The cooling with air dehumidification function in the rear compartment is only operative if the 4-zone Thermotronic cooling with air dehumidification function* is switched on. Controlling the air conditioning automatically In automatic mode, the set temperature is maintained at a constant level fully automatically. To do so, the system automatically regulates the temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air distribution. The automatic air conditioning will achieve optimal operation if "cooling with air dehumidification" is also activated. If necessary, cooling with air dehumidification can be deactivated. 22 Only or X 2-zone Thermatic only: press the © or ª air distribution button. The AUTO display for the air distribution goes out. The automatic control is deactivated and the air distribution is controlled according to the selected setting. Automatic airflow remains activated. or X 4-zone Thermotronic only*: turn air distribution thumbwheel 1 or 7 to the desired symbol (Y page 155). The indicator lamp in the U button goes out. The automatic control is deactivated and the air distribution is controlled according to the selected setting. Automatic airflow remains activated. Setting the temperature 2-zone Thermatic Different temperatures can be set for the driver's and front-passenger sides. X To increase/reduce: turn thumbwheels 1 and 7 clockwise or anti-clockwise (Y page 153). Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. 4-zone Thermotronic* The interior temperature for each of the four air-conditioning zones can be adjusted separately. Z for vehicles with 4-zone Thermotronic*. * optional 159 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 160 Controls Air conditioning Rear air-conditioning zones Adjusting the air vents X G Risk of injury Press the ™ button. The 4-zone Thermotronic* display switches to the rear-compartment air conditioning settings. X The air-conditioning zones of 4-zone Thermotronic* Front air-conditioning zones X To increase/reduce: press the $ or % button. Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. The set temperature is shown in the 4-zone Thermotronic* display. To increase/reduce: press the $ or % button. Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. The set temperature is shown in the 4-zone Thermotronic* display. The 4-zone Thermotronic* display changes back to the standard display about five seconds after a button is pressed. i You can also return to the standard display by pressing the ™ button again. Rear-compartment air conditioning* Different temperatures can be set for the left and right sides of the rear compartment. X To increase/reduce: press the $ or % button. Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. 160 Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could cause burns or frostbite to bare skin in the immediate vicinity of the vents. Keep bare skin away from these air outlets. If necessary, direct the airflow away to a different area of the vehicle interior. Please observe the following notes to ensure that the air can flow freely through the air vents: RKeep the air inlet between the windscreen and the bonnet free of deposits, such as ice and snow, to guarantee the supply of fresh air into the vehicle interior. RNever cover the vents or air inlet and outlet grilles in the vehicle interior. i Position the sliders for the centre air vents in the central position to provide virtually draught-free ventilation. * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 161 Controls Air conditioning Setting the centre air vents Setting the side air vents air is approximately the same as that of the air flowing from the centre air vents. ! Close the stowage compartment air vent when heating mode is activated and activate "cooling with air dehumidification" if the outside temperature is high. Otherwise, temperature-sensitive items stored in the stowage compartment could be damaged. Centre air vents 1 Centre air vent, left Side air vents 1 Side window demister vent 2 Centre air vent, right 3 Thumbwheel for centre air vent, right 2 Side air vent 3 Side air vent thumbwheel 4 Thumbwheel for centre air vent, left X To open/close: turn thumbwheels 3 and 4 up or down. X To open/close: turn thumbwheel 3 to the left or right. Setting the stowage compartment air vent The stowage compartment can be ventilated, for instance to cool its contents, when 2-zone Thermatic/4-zone Thermotronic* is activated. The level of airflow to the stowage compartment depends on the airflow and air distribution settings. The temperature of the * optional Stowage compartment air vent 1 Slide X To open the vent: pull slide 1 up. X To close the air vent: press slide 1 down. 161 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 162 Controls Air conditioning Setting the rear-compartment air vents Setting the air distribution Symbol Meaning 2-zone Thermatic Y The symbols for the air distribution have the following meanings: Directs the airflow to the front and rear footwells Ú Directs the airflow to the centre and side air vents and to the front and rear footwells Symbol Meaning b Directs the airflow to the entire vehicle interior c Rear-compartment air conditioning 1 Rear-compartment air vent, left 2 Rear-compartment air vent, right 3 Thumbwheel for rear-compartment air vent, right 4 Control panel for rear-compartment air conditioning*23 5 Thumbwheel for rear-compartment air vent, left X Z Directs the airflow through the demister vents to the windscreen and side windows X Directs the airflow through the demister vents to the windscreen and side windows and to the front and rear footwells a Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents To open/close: turn thumbwheels 3 and 5 up or down. 23 Rear-compartment 162 Directs the airflow through the demister vents to the windscreen and side windows and through the centre and side air vents X Press the © or ª button repeatedly until the 2-zone Thermatic display shows the desired symbol. 4-zone Thermotronic* The air distribution can be adjusted individually for the driver's and front-passenger sides. air conditioning* available only in conjunction with 4-zone Thermotronic*. * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 163 Controls Air conditioning The symbols for the air distribution have the following meanings: Symbol Meaning Z Directs the airflow through the centre, side and demister vents to the windscreen and side windows a Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents X Directs the airflow to the entire vehicle interior Y Directs the airflow to the centre and side air vents and to the front and rear footwells X X To increase/reduce: press the Q or · button. or X Demisting the windscreen i You should only select the "demisting" function until the windscreen is clear again. X To activate: press the y button. The indicator lamp in the y button comes on. The system automatically switches to the following functions: Rcooling Turn thumbwheel 1 or 7 to the corresponding symbol (Y page 155). The thumbwheel can also be turned to the area between two symbols. with air dehumidification on Rhigh airflow24 Rhigh temperature24 Press the U button. The indicator lamp in the y button goes out. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode. or X 2-zone Thermatic only: turn thumbwheel 1 or 7 clockwise or anti-clockwise (Y page 153). or X 2-zone Thermatic only: press the Q or · button. Rair distribution to the windscreen and front side windows Rair-recirculation X 24 Depending midification function remains on. Air-recirculation mode remains deactivated. Setting the airflow mode off To deactivate: press the y button. The indicator lamp in the y button goes out. The previously selected settings come into effect again. The cooling with air dehu- on the outside temperature. 163 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 164 Controls Air conditioning Windows misted up Windows misted up on the inside X Activate the "cooling function with airdehumidification" function. X Activate the automatic mode. X If the windows continue to mist up, activate the "demisting" function. Windows misted up on the outside X Activate the windscreen wipers. X 2-zone Thermatic: press and hold the © or ª button until the a, Ú or Y symbol is shown in the display. X 4-zone Thermotronic*: turn the thumbwheel for air distribution to the Y or a symbol. i You should only select this setting until the windscreen is clear again. 164 Switching the rear window heating on/off G Risk of accident Clear all windows of ice or snow before setting off. Impaired visibility could otherwise endanger yourself and others. i At very low temperatures, the rear window heating is only switched on once the vehicle interior has warmed up. i The rear window heating has a high current draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon as the window is clear, as it only switches itself off automatically after between six and twenty minutes. i If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window heating may switch off. X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the ¯ button. The indicator lamp in the ¯ switch lights up or goes out. Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if unpleasant odours are entering the vehicle from outside. The air already inside the vehicle will then be recirculated. G Risk of accident Only switch over to air-recirculation mode briefly at low outside temperatures. Otherwise, the windows could mist up, thus impairing visibility and endangering yourself and others. This may prevent you from observing the traffic conditions, thereby causing an accident. X To activate: press the , button. The indicator lamp in the , button comes on. i Air-recirculation mode is activated automatically at high outside temperatures. When air-recirculation mode is activated automatically, the indicator lamp in the , button is not lit. Outside air is added after about 30 minutes. * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 165 Controls Air conditioning X To deactivate: press the , button. The indicator lamp in the , button goes out. i Air-recirculation mode switches off automatically: Rafter approximately five minutes at outside temperatures below approximately 5† Rafter approximately five minutes if the air dehumidification is deactivated Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside temperatures above approximately 5† moves. If there is a risk of entrapment, press the , button again. If necessary, press the switch that stops, opens or closes the side window in the opposite direction. Make sure that nobody can become trapped when you are opening or closing the sliding/tilting sunroof*. If there is a risk of entrapment, press the , button again. If necessary, press the switch to stop, open or close the sliding/tilting sunroof* in the opposite direction. X Air-recirculation mode with the convenience opening/closing feature G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the side windows are opened and closed. Do not place objects or lean against the side window when it is being opened or closed. You or the objects could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the window * optional X Convenience closing: press and hold the , button until the side windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* have closed. The indicator lamp in the , button comes on. Air-recirculation mode is activated. Convenience opening: press and hold the , button until the side windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* have reached their original position. The indicator lamp in the , button goes out. Air-recirculation mode is deactivated. i If you open the side windows or the sliding/tilting sunroof* manually after closing using the convenience closing feature, it will remain in this position when opened using the convenience opening feature. Switching the residual heat/auxiliary ventilation on/off It is possible to make use of the residual heat of the engine to continue heating the stationary vehicle for up to 30 minutes after the engine has been switched off. The heating time depends on the set interior temperature. i The blower will run at a low speed regardless of the airflow setting. i If you activate the "residual heat" function at high temperatures, only the ventilation will be activated. The blower runs at medium speed. X Make sure that the key is in position 0 in the ignition lock or that it has been removed. X To switch on: press the T button. REST appears in the display. X To deactivate: press the T button. REST is no longer shown in the display. 165 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 166 Controls Air conditioning i The auxiliary heating/ventilation is automatically deactivated after about 30 minutes, or when: Rthe ignition is switched on Rthe battery voltage drops Auxiliary heating/ventilation* G Risk of poisoning Exhaust fumes are produced when the auxiliary heating is in operation. Inhaling these exhaust fumes can be poisonous. You should therefore switch off the auxiliary heating in confined spaces without an extraction system, e.g. a garage. G Risk of fire When operating the auxiliary heating, parts of the vehicle may become very hot, and highly inflammable material such as fuels could be ignited. Operating the auxiliary heating is thus prohibited at filling stations or when your vehicle is being refuelled. You must therefore switch off the auxiliary heating at filling stations. The auxiliary heating heats the air in the vehicle interior to a temperature between 20 °C 166 and 24 °C without using the heat of the running engine. The auxiliary heating is operated using fuel directly from the vehicle's fuel tank. For this reason, the tank content must be at least at reserve fuel level to ensure that the auxiliary heating functions. The auxiliary heating/ventilation automatically adjusts to changes in temperature and weather conditions. For this reason, the auxiliary heating could automatically switch over from ventilation mode to heating mode or from heating mode to ventilation mode. You cannot use the auxiliary ventilation to cool the vehicle interior to a temperature lower than the outside temperature. Activating or deactivating the auxiliary heating/ventilation The auxiliary heating/ventilation can be activated or deactivated via the remote control or the button on the centre console. The on-board computer can be used to specify up to three departure times, one of which may be preselected (Y page 128). Button on the centre console Before activating X Set the temperature to a value between 20 † and 24 †. The auxiliary heating/ventilation can be activated even when the air conditioning is being controlled manually. Optimum comfort can be attained when the system is set to automatic mode. Set the desired temperature within this range. If a higher temperature is set, the vehicle is heated to 24 †. If a lower temperature is set, the vehicle is heated to 20 †. 1 Button for auxiliary heating/ventilation The indicator lamps in the button may light up in blue, red or yellow. RBlue: RRed: auxiliary ventilation activated auxiliary heating activated RYellow: departure time preselected * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 167 Controls Air conditioning Activating the auxiliary heating/ventilation If the key is in position 1 or 2: X Press and hold button 1 for at least two seconds. The red or blue indicator lamp in the button lights up. If the key is removed or in position 0: X Briefly press button 1. The red or blue indicator lamp in the button lights up. Deactivating the auxiliary heating/ventilation X Briefly press button 1. The red or blue indicator lamp in the button goes out. Remote control Your vehicle comes with one remote control. You may use two additional remote controls for your vehicle. For further information, consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The remote control has a maximum range of approximately 300 metres. This range may be reduced by: Rsources of radio interference Rsolid objects between the remote control and the vehicle Rthe remote control being in an unfavourable position in relation to the vehicle Rtransmitting from an enclosed space i The optimum range can be achieved if you hold the remote control vertically, pointing upwards when you press one of the buttons. i A battery symbol appears in the display when the batteries in the remote control are low. Replace the remote control batteries (Y page 270). i More information about the auxiliary heating can be found in the "Practical advice" section (Y page 264). 1 Display 2 To check the status 3 OFF to deactivate auxiliary heating/ven- tilation 4 ON to activate auxiliary heating/ventila- tion 5 To check the status Using the remote control, you can: Ractivate or deactivate the auxiliary heating/ventilation Rcheck the status of the auxiliary heating/ ventilation Activating the auxiliary heating/ventilation X Press the ON button. 167 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 168 Controls Air conditioning The following messages can appear in the display: Display Meaning The auxiliary heating/ ventilation is activated. A malfunction has occurred in the auxiliary heating/ventilation. The heating or ventilation function selected by the system is not available. The battery is not charged sufficiently or the system is faulty. The signal transmission between the transmitter and the vehicle is faulty. The heating system has a fault or there is insufficient fuel in the fuel tank. The auxiliary heating is not working. The auxiliary ventilation is still functioning. 168 Deactivating the auxiliary heating/ventilation The auxiliary heating switches off automatically after 50 minutes. The following messages can appear in the display: i This time limit can be altered. To do this, The auxiliary heating/ ventilation is deactivated. visit a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X Meaning The auxiliary heating/ ventilation is deactivated. A malfunction has occurred in the auxiliary heating/ventilation. The heating or ventilation function selected by the system is not available. The battery is not charged sufficiently or the system is faulty. The signal transmission between the transmitter and the vehicle is faulty. The signal transmission between the transmitter and the vehicle is faulty. Press the OFF button. The following messages can appear in the display: Display Display Meaning Checking the status of the auxiliary heating X Press the p or o button. 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 169 Controls Sliding sunroof The auxiliary ventilation is switched on. The number in the remote control display indicates the remaining operating time of the auxiliary ventilation. The auxiliary heating is switched on. The number in the remote control display indicates the remaining operating time of the auxiliary heating. Sliding sunroof Sliding/tilting sunroof* G Risk of injury Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could operate the sliding/tilting sunroof and injure themselves. Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only leave it for a short time. G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped when you are opening and closing the sliding/tilting sunroof. If danger threatens, release the switch and push it briefly in any direction to stop the sliding/tilting sunroof. G Risk of injury The glass in the sliding/tilting sunroof could break in an accident. If you are not wearing a seat belt, there is a risk that you could be thrown through the opening in the event of the vehicle overturning. Therefore, always wear a seat belt to reduce the risk of injuries. * optional ! Only open the sliding/tilting sunroof if it is free of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may occur. Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding/tilting sunroof. The seals could otherwise be damaged. i Resonance noises can occur in addition to the usual airflow noises when the sliding/tilting sunroof is open. They are caused by minor pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior. Change the position of the sliding/tilting sunroof or open a side window slightly to reduce or eliminate these noises. i It is also possible to open and close the sliding/tilting sunroof from the outside using the "Summer opening" (Y page 100) and "Convenience closing" (Y page 100) features respectively. 169 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 170 Controls Sliding sunroof Closing 1 To open 2 To close/lower X To close manually: pull the switch in the direction of arrow 2 and hold it until the sliding/tilting sunroof is in the desired position. X To close fully: pull the switch briefly beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow 2 and release it. X To stop: push or pull the switch in any direction. X Close the cover manually if necessary (Y page 171). 3 To raise X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. Opening X To open manually: press the switch in the direction of arrow 1 and hold it until the sliding/tilting sunroof and the cover are in the desired position. X To open fully: press the switch briefly beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow 1 and release it. X To stop: push or pull the switch in any direction. 170 Closing with increased force and without the anti-entrapment feature G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped and be seriously or fatally injured as you close the sliding/tilting sunroof with increased force or without the anti-entrapment feature. direction of arrow 2 until the sliding/tilting sunroof is closed. The sliding/tilting sunroof is closed with more force. If the sliding/tilting sunroof locks up during closing again: X Raising The sliding/tilting sunroof can be raised at the rear for ventilation. X To raise manually: press the switch in the direction of arrow 3 and hold it until the sliding/tilting sunroof is in the desired position. X To raise fully: briefly press the switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow 3 and release it. X To stop: push or pull the switch in any direction. If the sliding/tilting sunroof locks up during closing: X Immediately after it locks up, pull the switch again to the pressure point in the Immediately after it locks up, pull the switch again to the pressure point in the direction of arrow 2 until the sliding/tilting sunroof is closed. The sliding/tilting sunroof is closed without the anti-entrapment feature. 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 171 Controls Sliding sunroof Lowering and closing X i The sliding/tilting sunroof does not close if: To lower manually: pull the switch in the direction of arrow 2 and hold it until the sliding/tilting sunroof is in the desired position. X To lower fully: pull the switch briefly beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow 2 and release it. X To stop: push or pull the switch in any direction. Rain closing feature The sliding/tilting sunroof closes automatically: Rif it starts to rain Rat extreme outside temperatures Rafter 12 hours Rif there is a malfunction in the power supply The rear of the sliding/tilting sunroof is then raised in order to ventilate the interior of the vehicle. i The sliding/tilting sunroof is opened slightly again if it is obstructed while being closed by the rain closing feature. The rain closing feature is then deactivated. Rit is raised at the rear Rit is blocked Rno rain is falling on the windscreen (e.g. because the vehicle is under a bridge or in a carport) Opening and closing the cover X Press the switch in the direction of arrow 3 and hold it until the sliding/tilting sunroof is fully raised at the rear. X Keep the switch pressed for an additional second. X Make sure that the sliding/tilting sunroof can be opened or closed fully again (Y page 170). X If this is not the case, consult a qualified specialist workshop. The cover functions as a sunblind. When you open the sliding/tilting sunroof, the cover moves back with it. When the sliding/tilting sunroof is closed or raised at the rear, you can open or close the cover manually. Resetting the sliding/tilting sunroof Reset the sliding/tilting sunroof if it does not move smoothly, or if the battery was disconnected or flat: X Remove the fuse for the sliding/tilting sunroof in the main fuse box (Y page 296). X Reinsert the fuse. X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. 171 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 172 Controls Loading and stowing Loading and stowing Cup holder* in the centre console Cup holder G Risk of injury Keep the cup holder closed while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, vehicle occupants could be injured by objects being thrown around if you: Rbrake sharply Rchange Rare direction suddenly X involved in an accident Only use the cup holders for containers of a suitable size and which have lids. Otherwise, the drinks could spill. Cup holders should not be used for hot drinks. Otherwise, you may scald yourself. X To open: press the marking on the cup holder lightly. The cup holder slides out automatically. Cup holder in the rear seat armrest i You can remove the cup holder to clean it. Clean the cup holder with clean, lukewarm water only. When reinserting the cup holder, make sure that you insert it into the guides. X 172 To close: press the side of the cup holder in the direction of the arrow. To open: press the front of the cup holder. The cup holder slides out automatically. * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 173 Controls Loading and stowing Cup holder* in the rear centre console X To remove: slide locking mechanism 2 in the direction of the arrow. X Remove cup holder 1. X To fit: insert cup holder 1. X Slide locking mechanism 2 in the opposite direction to the arrow. been tested and approved for MercedesBenz vehicles. This helps to prevent damage to the vehicle. Position the load on the roof rack in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, make sure that you can: Roof rack system* G Risk of accident and injury 1 Cover X To open: slide cover 1 forwards. 1 Cup holder 2 Locking mechanism * optional An incorrectly secured roof rack, ski rack or load could work loose from the vehicle. These objects may then be thrown around and can injure you or others or cause an accident. Follow the roof rack/ski rack manufacturers' installation instructions and special instructions for use. The roof load raises the vehicle's centre of gravity, thereby affecting vehicle handling. You must always observe the maximum roof load of 100 kg. Always adapt your driving style to the prevailing road, traffic and weather conditions and drive with particular care if the roof is laden. ! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use roof rack systems which have Rraise the sliding/tilting sunroof* fully Ropen the boot lid fully 1 Covers X Fold covers 1 upwards. X Only secure the roof rack to the anchorage points under covers 1. Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions. 173 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 174 Controls Loading and stowing Skibag* G Risk of injury The skibag is designed to carry up to four pairs of skis. Do not use the skibag to carry any other type of load. The skibag must always be secured when laden. Otherwise, injuries could be caused by it in the event of an accident. Unfolding the skibag and loading skis 1 Skibag 1 Cover X X Fold cover 1 upwards. X Open the boot lid. Pull skibag 1 into the vehicle interior. The skibag unfolds. X Open the front stowage compartment in the rear centre console. X Remove the rubber cover. or X Remove cup holder. 1 Cover 2 Release catches X Fold down the rear seat armrest. 1 Release button X Press release catches 2 together and fold down cover 1. X 174 Press release button 1. The flap opens downwards. * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 175 Controls Loading and stowing i You should always close the flap in the boot if you do not require the skibag. This will prevent access to the boot from the vehicle interior. Removing the skibag The skibag can be removed for cleaning or drying. X Open the boot lid. Skibag X Slide the skis into the skibag from the boot. 1 Hook 2 Securing ring X Engage hook 1 in securing ring 2. X Pull the strap tight by the loose end. Removing the skis and folding up the skibag 1 Strap X Pull strap 1 tight by the loose end until the skis are held firmly inside the skibag. X Loosen the two straps. X Remove the hook from the securing ring. X Take the skis out of the skibag. X Close the flap in the boot. X Smooth out the skibag and fold it up. X Stow the skibag in the rear seat backrest. X Fold the cover back up. 1 Button 2 Flap 3 Catch 4 Skibag frame 175 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 176 Controls Loading and stowing X Press button 1. Flap 2 folds down. Loading guidelines RAlways X Press catch 3 in and pull out frame 4 containing the skibag. Secure and position the load as described in the loading guidelines. Even if you follow all the loading guidelines, the load will increase the risk of injury in the event of an accident. G Risk of injury RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and G Risk of poisoning When the skibag has been removed, always drive with the boot lid closed. Exhaust fumes could otherwise enter the vehicle interior. Luggage net in the front-passenger footwell G Risk of injury Only place lightweight items in the luggage net. Do not use it to transport heavy, bulky, sharp-edged or fragile objects. In the event of an accident, the luggage net will not secure the transported goods. wear-resistant load restraints. Pad sharp edges for protection. i Load restraints are available at any qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a MercedesBenz Service Centre. G Risk of poisoning Keep the boot lid closed while the vehicle is in operation. Otherwise, exhaust fumes could enter the vehicle interior and poison you. Retaining hooks in the boot The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. You should therefore load your vehicle as shown in the illustrations. Observe the following notes when transporting a load: RWhen transporting a load, never exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight or the permissible axle loads for the vehicle (including occupants). RPosition heavy loads as far forwards and as low in the boot as possible. RThe load must not protrude above the upper edge of the backrests. 176 place the load against the front or rear seat backrests. 1 Tab 2 Hook X Pull down hook 2 by tab 1. 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 177 Controls Loading and stowing Stowage compartments Glove compartment G Risk of injury Stowage compartment in the centre console The stowage compartments must be closed when items are stored in them. Luggage nets are not designed to secure heavy items of luggage. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured by objects being thrown around if you: Rbrake sharply Rchange Rhave direction suddenly an accident Sharp-edged and fragile objects must not be carried in the luggage net. Do not carry hard objects in the ruffled pockets. Objects must not protrude over the top of the ruffled pockets. i You will find an overview of the stowage compartments on (Y page 38). 1 Opening button 2 Glove compartment The glove compartment can be locked and unlocked using the emergency key element (Y page 266). X To open: press opening button 1. X To close: fold the cover upwards. 1 Cover 2 Insert 3 Socket X To open: press lightly on the marking on the bottom of cover 1. The stowage compartment opens. i Insert 2 can be removed for cleaning. i Socket 3 can be used for 12V accessories with a maximum power consumption of 180 watts. You will find further information in the "12V sockets" section (Y page 182). 177 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 178 Controls Loading and stowing Stowage compartment in front of the armrest 2 Cover X To open: press the left-hand or right-hand side of button 1 and fold cover 2 to one side. Ventilating the stowage compartment The stowage compartment under the armrest can be ventilated (Y page 161). 1 Handle 1 Marking on cover X To open: press lightly on the cover behind the marking. The cover opens. X Front stowage compartment in the rear centre console To remove the insert: pull out the insert by handle 1. Stowage compartment/telephone compartment under the armrest 1 Cover X To open: slide cover 1 forwards. i The insert can be removed for cleaning. 1 Press 178 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 179 Controls Loading and stowing Rear stowage compartment in the rear centre console Stowage compartment in the rear seat armrest 1 Socket 2 Cover X X To open: slide cover 2 back. To open: push the handle upwards and raise the armrest. Stowage compartment under the driver's seat 1 Tab X To open: pull tab 1 upwards. X Fold the cover out. i Socket 1 can be used for 12V accessories with a maximum power consumption of 180 watts. You will find further information in the "12V sockets" section (Y page 182). 179 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 180 Controls Features Features Mirror in the sun visor Sun visors Mirror light 1 only comes on if the sun visor is clipped into retainer 2 and mirror cover 5 has been folded up. G Risk of accident Keep the mirrors in the sun visors covered while driving. You could otherwise be dazzled by bright lights, impairing your view of traffic conditions. As a result you could cause an accident. Glare from the side X Fold down the sun visor. X Pull the sun visor from retainer 2. X Swing the sun visor to the side. ! Make sure that the rear window blind can move freely. Otherwise, the blind or other objects could be damaged. i Always drive with the rear window blind either fully extended or retracted. X To extend or retract: briefly press button 1. The rear window blind fully extends or fully retracts. X To stop: briefly press button 1 again. Rear window blind* 1 Mirror light 2 Retainer 3 Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket 4 Vanity mirror 5 Mirror cover 180 1 To extend or retract the rear window blind * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 181 Controls Features Ashtray* Ashtray in the cockpit Ashtray in the rear compartment Cigarette lighter* The ashtray is located in the rear doors. G Risk of injury and fire Only hold the hot cigarette lighter by its knob. Otherwise, you might burn yourself. Make sure that children travelling in the vehicle are not able to injure themselves on the hot cigarette lighter or cause a fire with it. 1 Cinder bar 1 Cover 2 Sliding knob 2 To remove the insert 3 Ashtray X To open: press lightly on the marking at the bottom of cover 1. The ashtray opens. X To open: press lightly on the top of ashtray 3. The ashtray opens. X To remove the insert: press sliding knob 2 to the right. The ashtray insert slides out slightly. X To remove the insert: fold over cinder bar 1 with your finger and lift insert 2 upwards. X To refit the insert: press the insert into the holder until it clicks into place. X To refit the insert: press the insert into the holder until it clicks into place. * optional 1 Cigarette lighter 181 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 182 Controls Features X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press lightly on the marking at the bottom of the cover. The ashtray opens. X Press in cigarette lighter 1. Cigarette lighter 1 will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot. Socket in the cockpit A socket is fitted in the centre console on vehicles with the non-smoker's package. Socket in the rear passenger compartment The rear socket is located in the stowage compartment of the centre console. 12V socket The socket can be used for accessories with a maximum power consumption of 180 watts. X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. 1 Cover 2 Socket 3 Insert 1 Socket 2 Cover X X Slide cover 2 to the rear. X Fold cover of socket 1 upwards. X 182 Press lightly on the marking at the bottom of cover 1. The stowage compartment opens. Fold cover of socket 2 out to the right. 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 183 Controls Features Mobile phone* G Risk of accident Observe the legal requirements of the country in which you are currently driving regarding operating mobile communications equipment in a vehicle. If it is permitted by law to operate communications equipment while the vehicle is in motion, you must only do so when the traffic situation allows. You could otherwise be distracted from the traffic conditions, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Two-way radios and fax equipment used without low-reflection exterior aerials can interfere with the vehicle's electronics and thereby jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle and your safety. You must therefore only use this equipment if it is correctly connected to a separate reflection-free exterior aerial. G Risk of injury Excessive electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and the health of others. Using an exterior aerial takes into account current scientific discussions * optional relating to the possible health risk posed by electromagnetic fields. i In order to ensure optimum signal quality for mobile phones and to minimise mutual interference between the vehicle electronics and mobile phones, Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of an approved exterior aerial. An exterior aerial conducts the electromagnetic fields generated by a wireless device to the exterior of the vehicle; the field strength within the vehicle interior is lower than in a vehicle that does not have an exterior aerial. Inserting the mobile phone into the mobile phone bracket If the mobile phone is inserted into the mobile phone bracket, you can only speak to the person you are calling using the hands-free system. ! Do not attempt to remove the mobile phone and the telephone bracket together. You could otherwise damage the mobile phone bracket. X Remove the cover of the aerial plug from the back of the mobile phone and keep it in a safe place. i There are various mobile phone brackets that may be fitted to your vehicle; in some cases these are country-specific. You can obtain these mobile phone brackets from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The functions and services available when you use the phone depend on your mobile phone model and service provider. The mobile phone bracket is in the armrest. X Open the telephone compartment (Y page 178). 183 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 184 Controls Features i The system reads the phone book stored on the SIM card and in the mobile phone memory. If the same entry is stored in both of the phone books, both of these entries will be shown in the multi-function display. You can make a call using the s and t buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. You can control other mobile phone functions via the on-board computer (Y page 130). Example illustration 1 To engage the mobile phone 2 Connector contact 3 Mobile phone bracket X Slide the lower end of the mobile phone into connector contact 2 in mobile phone bracket 3. X Push the top part of the mobile phone in the direction of arrow 1 until it engages in mobile phone bracket 3. The mobile phone is connected to the hands-free system and to the multi-function steering wheel. The battery is charged depending on the charge status and the position of the key in the ignition lock. The charging process is shown in the mobile phone display. 184 i When you remove the key from the ignition lock, the mobile phone remains switched on for approximately ten minutes (run-on time). If you make a call during this time, the mobile phone will be switched off approximately ten minutes after you have ended the call. Run-on time: You can change the run-on time by making an additional phone book entry on the SIM card. For the name, enter "Idletime" and for the number, enter a figure between "1" and "30" (minutes). If you have not entered a number or have entered a different number, the run-on time of ten minutes will still apply. For information on how to create a phone book entry, refer to the mobile phone operating instructions. Own number sending: The hands-free system does not recognise whether own number sending is enabled or disabled in the mobile phone. The phone number is therefore always sent by default. By creating an additional phone book entry on the SIM card, you can switch the own number sending function on and off. For the name, enter "CALLID" and for the number, enter a "0" or a "1". Entering "0" will prevent the telephone number from being sent; entering "1" will allow it to be sent. For information on how to create a phone book entry, refer to the mobile phone operating instructions. 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 185 Controls Features Removing the mobile phone from the mobile phone bracket Removing the existing mobile phone bracket Example illustration 1 To release the mobile phone Example illustration 1 To release the mobile phone bracket 2 Mobile phone bracket 2 To remove the mobile phone bracket 3 Mobile phone bracket X Press the release catch in the direction of arrow 1 and remove the mobile phone upwards from mobile phone bracket 2. Fitting a different mobile phone bracket X Press the release button in the direction of arrow 1 and remove mobile phone bracket 3 in the direction of arrow 2. Fitting a different mobile phone bracket Example illustration 1 Contact plate 2 Recesses 3 Mobile phone bracket X Insert mobile phone bracket 3 into recesses 2 of contact plate 1. X Slide mobile phone bracket 3 forwards until it engages. If you require a different mobile phone bracket for your mobile phone, remove the existing mobile phone bracket and then fit the new one. 185 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 186 Controls Features Garage door opener* The remote control integrated in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up to three different door and gate systems. i The garage door opener is only available for certain countries. Observe the legal requirements in all countries concerned. The HomeLink® garage door opener is compatible with most European garage and gate opener drives. More information on HomeLink® and/or compatible products is available from: Rany Mercedes-Benz Service Centre HomeLink® hotline (0) 08000 466 354 65 (free of charge) or +49 (0) 6839 907-277 (at a charge) Rthe Rthe Internet: www.homelink.com Remote control in the rear-view mirror 1 Indicator lamp Erase the memory of the integrated remote control (Y page 187)before programming it for the first time. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press and hold one of transmitter buttons 2 to 4 on the integrated remote control. Indicator lamp 1 starts to flash after a short while. It flashes about once a second. i Indicator lamp 1 flashes immediately the first time the transmitter button is programmed. If this transmitter button has already been programmed, indicator lamp 1 will only start flashing at a rate of once a second after 20 seconds have elapsed. 2 Transmitter button 3 Transmitter button 4 Transmitter button G Risk of accident Only press the transmitter button on the integrated remote control if there are no persons or objects present within the sweep of the garage door. Persons could otherwise be injured as the door moves. Programming the remote control i You will achieve the best results by inserting new batteries in the garage door's remote control before programming it. 186 X X Keep the transmitter buttons depressed. X Point the garage door's remote control with the transmitter towards the left-hand side of the rear-view mirror from a distance of 5 to 20 cm. i The distance between the garage door's remote control and the integrated garage door opener depends on the system of the garage door drive. You might require several attempts. You should test every posi* optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 187 Controls Features tion for at least 20 seconds before trying another position. X X Keep the transmitter button on the garage door's remote control depressed until indicator lamp 1 starts to flash rapidly. The programming was successful if indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly. Release the transmitter buttons on the garage door's remote control and the integrated remote control. If indicator lamp 1 goes out after approximately 20 seconds and did not flash rapidly before this: X Release the transmitter buttons on the integrated and portable remote controls. X Repeat the programming procedure. At the same time change the distance between the garage door's remote control and the transmitter buttons in the rear-view mirror. i If the garage door system works with a rolling code, after programming you must synchronise the remote control integrated in the rear-view mirror with the garage door system receiver. You will find further information in the garage door opening system's operating * optional instructions, e.g. the sections on “Synchronising the transmitter” or “Registering a new transmitter”. You can also call the hotline mentioned above. Opening or closing the garage door Once programmed, the integrated remote control will assume the function of the garage door system's remote control. Please read the operating instructions for the garage door system. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the transmitter button on the rearview mirror that you have programmed to operate the garage door. Garage door system with fixed code: indicator lamp 1 lights up continuously. Garage door system with rolling code: indicator lamp 1 flashes briefly and then lights up for approximately two seconds. This is repeated for up to 20 seconds. i The transmitter will transmit a signal for as long as the transmitter button is being pressed. The transmission will be halted after a maximum of 20 seconds and indi- cator lamp 1 will flash. Press the transmitter button again if necessary. Clearing the remote control memory X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press and hold transmitter buttons 2 and 4 for approximately 20 seconds until indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly. The memory is cleared. i You should clear the remote control memory before selling the vehicle. Floormat* on the driver's side G Risk of accident Make sure that there is sufficient clearance around the pedals when floormats are used, and that the floormats are properly secured. The floormats must be secured at all times using retainers and studs. Before you drive off, make sure that the floormats are secure and rectify if necessary. A floormat which is not properly 187 Z 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, Controls Features secured can slip and thereby interfere with the movement of the pedals. Do not place floormats on top of one another. 1 Press-studs 2 Retainers X Slide seat backwards. X To fit: place the floormat in position. X Press stud 1 onto retainer 2. X To remove: pull floormat off retainers 2. X Remove the floormat. 188 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 188 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 189 Operation Running-in notes ............................... Refuelling ........................................... Engine compartment ........................ Tyres and wheels .............................. Winter driving ................................... Driving tips ........................................ Driving abroad ................................... Service ............................................... Care .................................................... 190 190 193 198 204 206 208 209 210 189 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 190 Operation Refuelling Running-in notes The first 1,500 km If you treat the engine with sufficient care from the very start, it will reward you with excellent performance for a very long period afterwards. RYou should therefore drive at varying road and engine speeds for the first 1,500 km. RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle, during this time. Do not exceed 2/3 of the maximum permissible engine speed for each gear. RChange gear in good time. RDo not shift down a gear manually in order to brake. RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown). use ranges 3, 2 or 1 for slow driving, e.g. in mountainous terrain. ROnly After 1,500 km you may gradually bring the vehicle up to full road and engine speeds. Additional driving tips for AMG vehicles: 190 RDo not drive faster than 140 km/h for the first 1,500 km. ROnly bring the engine up to a maximum speed of 4,500 rpm for a brief period. i You should also observe these notes if the engine or rear axle transmission on your vehicle has been replaced. AMG vehicles with a rear axle differential lock* Your vehicle is equipped with a self-locking differential on the rear axle. To better protect the differential gear on the rear axle, you should perform an oil change after a runningin phase of 3,000 km. This oil change will increase the service life of your differential. Have the oil change performed at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. Refuelling Refuelling G Risk of explosion Fuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking are therefore prohibited when handling fuels. Before refuelling, turn off the engine and the auxiliary heating*. G Risk of injury Avoid any contact with fuels. You can damage your health if your skin comes into direct contact with fuel or if you inhale the vapour. G Risk of fire Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine. Never mix diesel with petrol. This would damage the fuel system and engine and could result in a vehicle fire. ! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel will damage the injection system. Damage resulting from adding the wrong fuel is not covered by the warranty. * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 191 Operation Refuelling ! Do not start the engine if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, you risk engine damage. Consult a specialised qualified workshop and have the fuel system emptied completely. When you open or close the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS GO*, the fuel filler flap is automatically unlocked or locked. The fuel filler flap is to the rear on the right. X To open: press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow 1. The fuel filler flap opens slightly. X Open the fuel filler flap. X Turn the fuel filler cap to the left and remove it. X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder bracket on the inside of filler flap 2. X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off. ! Overfilling the tank could damage the fuel system. 1 To open the fuel filler flap 2 To insert the fuel cap 3 Tyre pressure table 4 Fuel type * optional X To close: replace the fuel filler cap and turn it clockwise. The fuel filler cap audibly engages. X Close the fuel filler flap. i Vehicles with a diesel engine: If you have run the tank completely dry, it will be necessary to bleed the fuel system (Y page 254). Petrol (EN 228) ! Refuel using only unleaded premium grade petrol with a minimum octane number of 95 RON/85 MON conforming to European standard EN 228. You could otherwise impair engine output or damage the engine. You will find further information about petrol under "Fuel" in the index. i As a temporary measure, but only when the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded petrol, 91 RON/82.5 MON. This may reduce performance and increase petrol consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle. In some countries, the available petrol quality may not be sufficient and could cause coking around the inlet valve. In such cases, and in consultation with a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, the petrol may be mixed with the additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz (part no. A000989254510). You must observe the notes and mixing ratios given on the container. 191 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 192 Operation Refuelling CLS 350 CGI ! Refuel using only unleaded premium grade petrol with a minimum octane number of 95 RON/85 MON conforming to European standard EN 228. You could otherwise impair engine output or damage the engine. You will find further information about petrol under "Technical data" in the index. i In some countries, only petrol of insufficient quality (high-sulphur fuel) may be available. This fuel can temporarily produce unpleasant odours, especially on short journeys. Refuelling with petrol of sufficient quality (sulphur-free fuel) will reduce such odours. AMG vehicles ! Refuel using only super unleaded petrol with a minimum octane number of 98 RON/88 MON conforming to European standard EN 228. You could otherwise impair engine output or damage the engine. You will find further information about petrol under "Technical data" in the index. 192 i If the recommended fuel is not available and only as a temporary measure, you may also use premium unleaded petrol, 95 RON/85 MON. This may reduce performance and increase petrol consumption. You must avoid driving at full throttle. ! In emergencies, only when the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use standard unleaded petrol, 91 RON/ 82.5 MON. However, using this fuel results in considerably higher petrol consumption and significantly reduced performance. Avoid driving at full throttle, and only drive in drive program C. If no fuel other than regular petrol fuel 91 RON/82.5 MON or a lower grade is permanently available, you should have the vehicle adapted to run on this fuel by the local after-sales service. Diesel (EN 590) ! Only use diesel that complies with the EN 590 European standard. You could otherwise impair engine output or damage the engine. You will find further information about diesel under "Fuel" in the index. ! When refuelling vehicles with a diesel particle filter in countries outside the EU, only low-sulphur Euro diesel with less than 0.005 percent sulphur content by weight should be used. In countries in which diesel with a higher sulphur content is available (e.g. 0.035 percent by weight), the engine oil should be renewed at more frequent intervals. More information about intervals for changing the engine oil can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ! Using fuel that does not comply with EN 590 can increase wear and damage the engine and the exhaust system. Do not use the following: RMarine diesel RHeating oil RBio-diesel 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 193 Operation Engine compartment RVegetable oil RPetrol RPetroleum RKerosene Do not add such fuels to diesel fuel and do not use any special additives (exception: flow improvers – see "Low outside temperatures"). Damage caused by the use of unapproved fuels or additives is not covered by the warranty. Low outside temperatures The flow properties of diesel may be insufficient at low ambient temperatures. To prevent operating problems, diesel fuel with improved cold flow qualities is available during the winter months. Your vehicle must be refuelled with this winter diesel at temperatures of -5 °C or below. You can use this winter diesel at temperatures down to about -20 °C without problems. If only summer diesel fuel or less cold-resistant winter diesel fuel (e.g. in Mediterranean regions) is available, you should add an amount of flow improver to the fuel corresponding to the outside temperature. Mix the additive with the diesel in good time, before the flow properties of the diesel become insufficient. Otherwise, malfunctions can only be rectified by heating the entire fuel system, e.g. by parking the vehicle in a heated garage. G Risk of fire Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine. Never mix diesel with petrol. This would damage the fuel system and engine and could result in a vehicle fire. Flow improver The effectiveness of a flow improver is not guaranteed with every fuel. Observe the information provided by the manufacturer when using a flow improver. Only use flow improvers that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Information about flow improvers that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Engine compartment Bonnet G Risk of accident Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle is in motion. The bonnet could otherwise open. Opening G Risk of injury There is a risk of injury if the bonnet is open, even if the engine is not running. Some engine components can become very hot. To avoid the risk of burns, only touch those components described in the Owner’s Manual and observe the relevant safety notes. G Risk of injury The radiator fan between the radiator and the engine can start automatically, even if the key has been removed from the ignition lock. For this reason you must not reach into the turning area of the fan. You could otherwise sustain an injury. Vehicles with a petrol engine: 193 Z 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 194 Operation Engine compartment The electronic ignition system uses high voltage. For this reason you must never touch components of the ignition system (ignition coil, ignition cable, spark plug connector or test socket) when: Rthe engine is running Rthe engine is being started Make sure that the windscreen wipers are switched off and that the key has been pulled out of the ignition lock before opening the bonnet. The handle for opening the bonnet is located above the radiator grille. The bonnet release lever is located in the driver's footwell. Rthe ignition is switched on and the engine is being cranked by hand Vehicles with a diesel engine: The electronic injection control uses high voltage. Therefore, never touch fuel injection system components when: Rthe engine is running Rthe engine is being started Rthe ignition is switched on X Make sure that the windscreen wipers are switched off. G Risk of injury The windscreen wipers and wiper rods could be set in motion. When the bonnet is open, you or others could be injured by the wiper rods. 194 2 Bonnet catch handle X 1 Bonnet release lever X Pull release lever 1. The bonnet is released. ! Make sure that the windscreen wipers are not folded away from the windscreen. You could otherwise damage the windscreen wipers or the bonnet. Reach into the gap, pull bonnet catch handle 2 up and lift the bonnet. Closing G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped as you close the bonnet. X Lower the bonnet and let it fall from a height of approximately 20 cm. The bonnet engages into place. 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 195 Operation Engine compartment Engine oil Using the oil dipstick mark 3 and upper mark 2 is approximately 2 litres. Depending on how it is driven, the vehicle consumes a maximum of 0.8 l oil per 1,000 km. The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds. You can only estimate the oil consumption after you have driven a considerable distance. You will find further information about engine oil in the "Technical data" section (Y page 314). Checking the engine oil level To do so: Rthe vehicle should be parked on level ground Rthe engine should be switched off for at least five minutes if the engine was at normal operating temperature Rthe engine should be switched off for at least 30 minutes if the engine was not at operating temperature (i.e. if you only started the engine briefly) i The difference in quantity between lower Topping up the engine oil Example of a vehicle with a petrol engine (CLS 350) 1 Oil dipstick 2 Upper mark 3 Lower mark X Pull oil dipstick 1 out of the oil dipstick tube. X Wipe off oil dipstick 1. X Insert oil dipstick 1 into the oil dipstick tube to the stop, and take it out again. The oil level is correct if the level is between lower mark 3 and upper mark 2. X Top up the oil if necessary (Y page 195). Example of a vehicle with a petrol engine (CLS 350) 1 Cover 195 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 196 Operation Engine compartment Coolant Checking the coolant level G Risk of injury The expansion tank is located in the engine compartment on the left when viewed in the direction of travel. The cooling system is pressurised. Therefore, only unscrew the cap once the engine has cooled down. The coolant temperature gauge must display less than 70°C. You could otherwise be scalded by escaping hot coolant. Example of a vehicle with a diesel engine (CLS 320 CDI) 1 Cover X Unscrew cap 1 and remove it. X Top up by the amount of oil required. ! Do not add too much oil. If too much oil is added, there is a risk of damage to the engine or the catalytic converter. X Screw cap 1 onto the filler neck. H Environmental note When topping up the oil, take care not to spill any. Oil must not be allowed to escape into the soil or waterways. You would otherwise be damaging the environment. 196 Coolant consists of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. Only check the coolant level when the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down. 1 Cover 2 Expansion tank 3 Marker bar X Slowly turn cap 1 by half a turn anti-clockwise to allow excess pressure to escape. X Turn cap 1 further anti-clockwise and remove it. There is sufficient coolant in expansion tank 2 if the coolant is level with marker bar 3 in the filler neck when cold or approximately 1.5 cm higher when hot. 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 197 Operation Engine compartment X Top up the coolant if necessary. X Replace cap 1 and tighten all the way to the stop. You will find further information about coolant in the "Technical data" section (Y page 316). Windscreen washer system/headlamp cleaning system* The washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment on the right when viewed in the direction of travel. The headlamp cleaning system* is also supplied from the washer fluid reservoir. X Add windscreen washer concentrate to the washer fluid all year round. G Risk of fire X To open: pull cap 1 upwards by the tab. X To close: press cap 1 onto the filler neck until it clicks into place. Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when windscreen washer concentrate is being handled. Use Ra windscreen washer fluid additive such as MB Summerwash to prevent smearing (for temperatures above freezing). Ra windscreen washer fluid additive with antifreeze properties such as MB Winterwash (if there is a risk of frost). X Mix the windscreen washer fluid in a container beforehand. Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside temperatures. ! Only use windscreen washer fluid which is suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Unsuitable windscreen washer fluid could damage the plastic lamp lenses of the headlamps. 1 Cover * optional 197 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 198 Operation Tyres and wheels Tyres and wheels Points to remember ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use tyres and wheels which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehicle. These tyres have been specially adapted for use with the control systems, such as ABS or ESP®, and are marked as follows: RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (with run-flat characteristics)* Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tyres* should only be used on wheels that have been specifically approved by MercedesBenz. If you use other tyres and wheels, Mercedes-Benz cannot accept any responsibility for damage that may result from this. Further information about tyres, wheels and approved combinations can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. If you use tyres other than those tested and recommended for Mercedes-Benz vehicles, characteristics such as handling, vehicle noise emissions and fuel consumption 198 may be adversely affected. In addition, the wheels may come into contact with the body or axle components when heavily loaded or when driving with snow chains. This could result in damage to the tyres or the vehicle. ! Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tyres. As a result, Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded tyres are fitted. Do not fit used tyres if you have no information about their previous usage. G Risk of accident If wheels or tyres other than those which have been tested are fitted: Rthe brakes or chassis components could be damaged Rwheel and tyre clearances can no longer be guaranteed This could cause an accident. Modification work on the brake system and wheels is not permitted, nor is the use of spacer plates or brake dust shields. This invalidates the General Operating Permit for the vehicle. Notes on selecting, fitting and replacing tyres ROnly fit tyres and wheels of the same type and make. ROnly fit tyres of the correct size onto the wheels. RAfter fitting new tyres, run them in at moderate speeds for the first 100 km as they only reach their full performance after this distance. RFit new tyres on the front wheels first if tyres of the same size are required on the front and rear wheels. RReplace the tyres after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. This also applies to the spare wheel*. RDo not drive with tyres which have too little tread depth as this significantly reduces the traction on wet roads (aquaplaning). ! Store tyres that are not being used in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tyres against oil, grease, petrol and diesel. * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 199 Operation Tyres and wheels Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres RRegularly check the wheels and tyres of your vehicle for damage (e.g. cuts, punctures, tears, bumps on tyres and deformation, cracks or severe corrosion on wheels), at least every 14 days, as well as after offroad trips or after travelling on rough roads. Damaged wheels could cause a loss of tyre pressure. RRegularly check the tyre tread depth and the condition of the tread across the whole width of the tyre (Y page 200). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tyre surface. RAll wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. RRegularly check the pressure of all your tyres (including the spare tyre*), particularly prior to long trips, and correct the pressure as necessary (Y page 200). Notes on driving RWhile driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual handling characteris- 25 Only tics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tyres are damaged. If you suspect that a tyre is defective, reduce your speed and stop the vehicle as soon as possible to check the wheels and tyres for damage. Hidden tyre damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you find no signs of damage, have the wheels and tyres inspected at a specialist workshop, for example at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. RWhen parking your vehicle, make sure that the tyres do not get deformed by the kerb or other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over kerbs, speed humps or similar, try to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Otherwise, the tyres, particularly the sidewalls, could get damaged. Direction of rotation Direction of rotation Tyres with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of aquaplaning. You will only gain these benefits if the correct direction of rotation is observed. An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indicates its correct direction of rotation. i You may fit a spare tyre* against the direction of rotation. MOExtended run-flat system* The MOExtended run-flat system allows you to continue driving the vehicle even when one or more tyres lose all air pressure. The MOExtended run-flat system may only be used in conjunction with the tyre pressure loss warning system or the tyre pressure monitor* and on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes-Benz. i Vehicles with MOExtended run-flat system are not equipped with the TIREFIT kit*25. for certain countries * optional 199 Z 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 200 Operation Tyres and wheels It is therefore recommended to additionally equip your vehicle with the TIREFIT kit* when fitting tyres that do not feature runflat properties, e.g. winter tyres. i A TIREFIT kit* is available from any qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a MercedesBenz Service Centre. You will find notes on driving with a flat tyre in the "Practical advice" section (Y page 287). Tyre tread G Risk of accident Bear in mind that: Rtyre grip decreases rapidly on wet roads when the tread depth is less than 3 mm. You should thus replace tyres that have insufficient tread. Rwinter tyres should be replaced when the tread depth is 4 mm or less because otherwise they no longer provide adequate grip. Rthe tread on a tyre may not wear evenly. You should thus regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread 200 across the entire width of all tyres. If necessary, turn the steering wheel so that you can see the tyre tread more easily. You could otherwise lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident due to the reduced grip of the tyres on the road. Tyre pressures G Risk of accident Tyre pressure that is either too high or too low has a negative effect on the vehicle’s active safety, which could lead you to cause an accident. You should therefore regularly check the pressure of all your tyres (including the spare tyre*), particularly prior to long trips, and correct the pressure as necessary. To test tyre pressure, use a suitable pressure gauge. The outer appearance of a tyre does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tyre pressure. On vehicles fitted with the electronic tyre pressure monitor*, the tyre pressure can be checked in the on-board computer. If the vehicle is to be heavily laden or driven at high speeds, the tyre pressure must be adapted according to the specifications given in the fuel filler flap (Y page 190). Use the highest specified tyre pressure for the spare wheel*. G Risk of accident Should the tyre pressure drop repeatedly: RCheck the tyre for foreign bodies. RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking. Tyre pressure that is too low has a negative effect on the vehicle’s active safety, which could lead to your causing an accident. Tyre pressure changes by approximately 0.1 bar for every 10 °C change in ambient temperature. If you measure the tyre pressure in enclosed spaces where the temperature differs from the outside temperature, you will have to correct the measured value accordingly. When the vehicle is driven, the tyre temperature, and with it the tyre pressure, will increase depending on the road speed and the load on the tyres. Therefore, you should only correct tyre pressures when the tyres are cold. * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 201 Operation Tyres and wheels The pressure of warm tyres should only be corrected if it is too low for the current operating conditions. You will find a table of tyre pressures for various operating conditions on the inside of your vehicle's fuel filler flap. Driving with tyre pressure that is too high or too low can: Rshorten the service life of the tyres Rcause increased tyre damage Rhave a negative effect on handling characteristics (e.g. by causing aquaplaning) i The tyre pressure values given for low loads are minimum values which offer you good ride comfort characteristics. You can, however, also use the values given for higher loads. These are permissible and will not adversely affect the running of the vehicle. Also check the tyre pressure of the spare wheel*. H Environmental note Check the tyre pressure regularly, and at least every 14 days. * optional Tyre pressure loss warning system G Risk of accident The tyre pressure loss warning system does not warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. The table on the inside of the fuel filler flap will help you decide whether the tyre pressures should be corrected. The tyre pressure loss warning system does not replace the need to regularly check your vehicle's tyre pressures, since an even loss of pressure on several tyres at the same time cannot be detected by the tyre pressure loss warning system. The tyre pressure loss warning system is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Do not make any sudden steering movements when doing so. While the vehicle is in motion, the tyre pressure loss warning system monitors the set tyre pressure using the rotational speed of the wheels. This enables the system to detect significant pressure loss in a tyre. If the speed of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning message will appear in the multi-function display. The function of the tyre pressure loss warning system is limited or delayed if: Rsnow chains are fitted to your vehicle's tyres Rroad Ryou conditions are wintry are driving on sand or gravel Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cornering at high speeds or driving with high rates of acceleration) Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the vehicle or on the roof) Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system if you have: Rchanged the tyre pressure Rchanged Rfitted X the wheels or tyres new wheels or tyres Before restarting, consult the table of tyre pressures on the inside of the fuel filler flap to ensure that the tyre pressure in all four 201 Z 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 202 Operation Tyres and wheels tyres is set correctly for the operating conditions concerned. X Also observe the notes in the section on tyre pressures (Y page 200). G Risk of accident The tyre pressure loss warning system can only give reliable warnings if you have set the correct tyre pressure. If an incorrect tyre pressure is set, these incorrect values will be monitored. A tyre with insufficient pressure results in an instability of the vehicle when driving, thus increasing the risk of an accident. X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. The standard display appears in the multifunction display (Y page 115). X Press k or j to select the tyre pressure function: Run Flat Indicator active Menu: R-Button æ X Press the reset button on the left of the instrument cluster. The following message appears in the multi-function display: Restart Run Flat Indicator? 202 Yes Cancel If you wish to confirm the restart: X Press the æ button. The following message appears in the multi-function display: Run Flat Indicator restarted After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure loss warning system will monitor the set tyre pressures of all four tyres. If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the ç button. or X Wait until the message Restart Run Flat Indicator? Yes Cancel disappears. The tyre pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. Checking the tyre pressure electronically* The tyre pressure monitor only functions if the correct wheel electronics are fitted to all wheels. These monitor the pressure in all four tyres, which you have set when restarting the tyre pressure monitor. The monitor warns you when the pressure drops in one or more of the tyres. G Risk of accident The tyre pressure monitor does not warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. The table on the inside of the fuel filler flap will help you decide whether the tyre pressures should be corrected. The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Do not make any sudden steering movements when doing so. i The operation of the tyre pressure monitor can be affected by interference from radio transmitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way radios) that may be being operated in or near the vehicle. * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 203 Operation Tyres and wheels i If you are carrying a deflated tyre in the vehicle, you may only reactivate the tyre pressure monitor if: Rthe deflated tyre is no longer in the vehicle Ryou have adjusted the tyre pressure correctly Calling up the tyre pressure using the on-board computer X X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. Press the j or k button to select the tyre pressure function. Tyre pressure displayed only after driving for a few minutes Rchanged the tyre pressure Rchanged the wheels or tyres i The tyre pressure values indicated by the Rfitted on-board computer may differ from those measured at a filling station with a pressure gauge. The tyres pressures shown by the on-board computer refer to those measured at sea level. The tyre pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ when the vehicle is at high altitude. In this case, do not reduce the tyre pressures. If you wish to define the new reference values manually: X Use the table on the inside of the fuel filler flap to ensure that the tyre pressure is set correctly in all four tyres for the current operating conditions. Also observe the notes in the section on tyre pressures (Y page 200). X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. The standard display appears in the multifunction display (Y page 115). X Press the j or k button to select the Tyre pressure function or wait until the following message appears: Tyre pressure displayed only after driving for a few minutes Tyre pressure warning If the tyre pressure on one or more wheels drops significantly, a message appears in the multi-function display. The tyre pressure of the affected wheel(s) will be displayed in a red rectangle. You will also hear a warning tone. new wheels or tyres Restarting the tyre pressure monitor The current tyre pressure for each wheel will be displayed. If the vehicle has been parked for longer than 20 minutes or you have not driven faster than 25 km/h since the vehicle was parked, the following message appears: In most cases, the tyre pressure monitor will automatically detect the new reference values, e.g. if you have: Z 203 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 204 Operation Winter driving X X Press the reset button on the left of the instrument cluster (Y page 209). The following message appears in the multi-function display: Check current tyre pressure? Press the æ button. The following message appears in the multi-function display: Tyre pressure monitor restarted The tyre pressure monitor has stored the pressure of the tyres as a new reference value. If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the ç button. Winter driving Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, at the onset of winter. ! Do not use a sharp object to remove snow or ice from the trim on the B-pillar between the side windows. Winter tyres Use winter tyres at temperatures below +7 ° C and on snow or ice-covered roads. Only then can the effect of the ABS and ESP® driving systems be ensured in winter too. Use winter tyres of the same make and tread on all wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics. G Risk of accident You must replace winter tyres with a tread depth of less than 4 mm immediately. They are no longer suitable for winter use, in particular because they do not provide sufficient grip. This could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. 26 Only 204 Always observe the maximum permitted speed specified for the winter tyres you have fitted. If you fit winter tyres which have a lower maximum permitted speed than that of the vehicle, affix an appropriate warning sign in the driver's field of vision. This can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. In such circumstances, you should also restrict the maximum speed of the vehicle using permanent Speedtronic 26 to the maximum permissible speed for winter tyres (Y page 144). Once you have fitted the winter tyres: X Restart the tyre pressure monitor* (Y page 202). G Risk of accident If you fit the spare wheel* when driving with winter tyres, bear in mind that driving stability will be impaired owing to unstable cornering characteristics caused by the different tyres. You should therefore adapt your driving style and drive carefully. Have the spare wheel* replaced at the nearest qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work available for certain countries. * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 205 Operation Winter driving required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Snow chains For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use snow chains which have been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are of a corresponding standard of quality. ! Information about the use of snow chaincompatible AMG winter tyres is applicable for AMG tyres. Use of snow chains is only permissible with these tyres. If you intend to fit snow chains, please bear the following points in mind: chains cannot be fitted to all wheel/ tyre combinations. RSnow Winter driving RSnow G Risk of accident chains must not be fitted to emergency spare wheels, e.g. the "Minispare" or collapsible emergency spare wheel. RFit snow chains to both rear wheels. Comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions. ! If snow chains are fitted to the front wheels, they may come into contact with the bodywork and axle components when the vehicle is in motion and damage the tyre or the vehicle. On vehicles with AIRMATIC DC*, you must only drive at raised vehicle level if snow chains have been fitted (Y page 146). Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 km/h. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. You should drive particularly carefully on slippery road surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and braking manoeuvres. If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be stopped when moving at low speed: X Shift the selector lever to N. X Try to bring the vehicle under control using corrective steering. i You may wish to deactivate ESP® when pulling away with snow chains fitted (Y page 59). This way you can allow the wheels to spin in a controlled manner, achieving an increased driving force (cutting action). 205 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 206 Operation Driving tips Driving tips Downhill gradients Rolling with the engine switched off On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden, you must select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. G Risk of accident Never switch the engine off while the vehicle is in motion. There is no power assistance for the steering and the service brake when the engine is not running. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake and you could therefore lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. Braking G Risk of accident Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. G Risk of accident Make sure that other road users are not endangered by your braking. 206 i This also applies if you have activated cruise control, Speedtronic or Distronic*. This uses the braking effect of the engine and you will not have to brake to such an extent to maintain the same speed. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If you need additional braking, depress the brake pedal repeatedly rather than continuously. Heavy and light loads If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy load, do not stop the vehicle immediately, but drive on for a short while. This allows the airflow to cool the brakes more quickly. G Risk of accident Never depress the brake pedal continuously while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never cause the brakes to rub by applying constant slight pedal pressure. This causes the brake system to overheat, increases the braking distance and can lead to the brakes failing completely. If the brakes have been used only moderately, you should occasionally test their effectiveness. To do this, brake more firmly from a higher speed. This improves the grip of the brakes. Wet roads If driving in heavy rain for a prolonged period of time without braking, there may be a delayed reaction from the brakes, when braking for the first time. You must brake harder. You must therefore maintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front. Brake firmly after driving on a wet road. This way the brake discs will become warm, drying more quickly, which will protect them against corrosion. Limited braking performance on salted roads G Risk of accident The layer of salt on the brake discs and the brake pads/linings may cause a delay in the braking effect, resulting in a signifi* optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 207 Operation Driving tips cantly longer braking distance, which could lead to an accident. To avoid this danger, you should: Roccasionally brake carefully, without putting other road users at risk, when you are driving on salted roads. This helps to remove any salt that may have started to build up on the brake discs and the brake pads/linings. G Risk of accident New brake pads/linings only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometres of driving. Before this optimum braking effect is reached, you should compensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater pressure when braking. This also applies after the brake discs or the brake pads/linings have been replaced. Rmaintain a greater distance to the vehicle ahead and drive with particular care. Rcarefully apply the brakes at the end of a trip and immediately after commencing a new trip, so that salt residues are removed from the brake disc. New brake linings For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only have only brake pads/ linings fitted to your vehicle that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspond to an equivalent quality standard. Brake pads/linings which have not been approved for Mercedes-Benz or which are not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety. High-performance brake system for AMG vehicles The high-performance brake system is designed for heavy loads. Braking can therefore cause noises. This will depend on: RSpeed RBraking Tyre grip G Risk of accident Whereas the vehicle can be fully controlled at a certain speed on dry roads, you must reduce your speed on wet or icy roads to achieve the same road safety. Otherwise you could cause an accident. Pay particular attention to the road conditions at temperatures around freezing point. If ice has formed on the road surface (e.g. from fog), a light film of water rapidly forms on the ice when you brake, considerably reducing tyre grip. Drive with particular care in such weather conditions. force REnvironmental conditions, such as temper- ature and humidity The wear of individual components of the brake system, such as the brake pads/linings or brake discs, depends on the individual driving style and operating conditions. Because of this, it is impossible to state a mileage that will be valid under all circumstances. An aggressive driving style will lead to high wear. 207 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 208 Operation Driving abroad Driving on wet roads If water has accumulated to a certain depth on the road surface, there is a danger of aquaplaning occurring, even if: Ryou drive at low speeds Rthe tyres have adequate tread depth For this reason, do not drive in tyre ruts, and brake carefully. Driving on flooded roads If you have to drive on stretches of road on which water has collected, please bear in mind that: RThe maximum permitted depth in still water is 25 cm. RYou should drive no faster than at walking pace. ! Bear in mind that vehicles travelling in front or in the opposite direction create waves. This may cause the maximum permissible water depth to be exceeded. You must observe these notes, otherwise damage may occur to the engine, electrics and transmission. 208 Driving abroad An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is also available in other countries. You can obtain the relevant workshop directories from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Only low-octane fuel is available in certain countries. You can find further information about fuel grades on (Y page 190). Symmetrical dipped beam If your journey takes you to countries where vehicles are driven on the opposite side of the road to the country in which the vehicle is registered, your headlamps must be switched to symmetrical dipped beam. Oncoming traffic will be dazzled less. X Have the headlamps switched over at a qualified specialist workshop, e. g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G Risk of accident Have your headlamps switched back to asymmetrical dipped beam if you visit a country in which traffic drives on the same side of the road as in the country in which your vehicle was registered. You may oth- erwise dazzle the oncoming traffic and could cause an accident. 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 209 Operation Service Service Active Service System PLUS ASSYST PLUS, the Active Service System, tells you when the next service is due. Whenever a service is due, this is shown in the multi-function display: Service A due in .. days Service A due in .. km Service A due now to subtract the battery-disconnection periods from the service date shown on the display. Fading out the service message Exceeding the service due date One of the following messages appears in the multi-function display: Service A overdue by .. days Service A overdue by .. km You will also hear a warning tone. A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, will reset the service indicator when it carries out the necessary service work. i If you fail to have the service performed 1 Reset button The letter indicates how much time the workshop will require to carry out the service work. The letters displayed range from A for a short service duration to H for a long service duration. ASSYST PLUS does not record any periods of time during which the battery is disconnected. In order to maintain the time-dependent service schedule, you should call up the service due date and make a note of it before you disconnect the battery. The alternative is X by the specified date, you may be contravening the relevant laws, your warranty may be invalidated and ex gratia claims may be refused. Press reset button 1. 209 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 210 Operation Care Calling up the service due date Use the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. X Switch on the ignition. X X X Press è or ÿ to select the Basic display menu (Y page 115). Press j or k to select the service information. The 9 service symbol and the service due date are displayed. To select a different display, press j, è or ÿ. H Environmental note Care Notes on care Regular and proper care maintains the value of your vehicle. i It is advisable to use Mercedes-Benz care products. Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by inadequate care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Repair damage caused by loose chippings and remove the following substances immediately, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard: RSoak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off afterwards. RSoak bird droppings with water and rinse off afterwards. RRemove tree resin, oils, fuels and grease by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in cleaning or lighter fluid. 210 RUse silicone remover to remove wax. RUse tar remover to remove tar stains. Dispose of empty packaging, cleaning cloths and polishing wads in an environmentally responsible manner. ! Do not affix: Rstickers Rfilms Rmagnetic plates or similar to painted surfaces, otherwise you could damage the paintwork. Vehicle care ! Do not park the vehicle for a long period of time directly after cleaning, especially if the wheels have just been cleaned with a wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause rapid corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. After cleaning, park the vehicle when it is at normal operating temperature. 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 211 Operation Care Automatic car wash G Risk of accident The vehicle is braked when HOLD is activated. Therefore, deactivate HOLD before the vehicle is washed in an automatic car wash. You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash from the very start. ! Do not use a touch-free automatic car wash that uses chemical agents to wash the vehicle. Preferably use one with high-pressure jets for prewashing. If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it before cleaning it in an automatic car wash. ! Make sure that the automatic car wash is suitable for the size of the vehicle. Fold in the exterior mirrors before the vehicle is washed. There is otherwise a risk of damage to the exterior mirrors. ! Make sure the side windows are completely closed, the ventilation/heater blower is fully turned off and the windscreen wiper switch is set to 0. The rain sensor may otherwise be activated, for instance, leading to inadvertent wiper sweeps being triggered. This could cause damage to the vehicle. RBattery RConnectors After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax from the windscreen and the wiper blades. This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises caused by residue on the windscreen. High-pressure cleaners G Risk of accident Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) to clean your vehicle or - especially - the tyres. You could otherwise damage the tyres and cause an accident. ! Observe the instructions issued by the equipment manufacturer concerning the distance to be maintained between the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner and the vehicle (at least 30 cm). Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle. Do not aim directly at any of the following: RTyres RDoor RBulbs RSeals Damaged seals or electrical components can lead to failures or leaks. Cleaning the wiper blades and the outside of the windscreen G Risk of injury Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock before cleaning the windscreen or the wiper blades. There is otherwise a risk of the windscreen wipers being set in motion and causing injury. X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 74). X Set the windscreen wipers to the u position on the combination switch (Y page 97). X Turn the key to position 0 or remove it when the wiper arms are vertical (Y page 74). joint RElectrical components 211 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 212 Operation Care ! Only fold the windscreen wipers away i Anti-glare film retrofitted to the insides of from the windscreen when vertical, otherwise you will damage the bonnet. X Fold the wiper arms away from the windscreen until you feel them engage. X Clean the windscreen and the wiper blades. X Fold the windscreen wipers back again before the ignition is switched on. the windows could interfere with radio or mobile phone reception, especially if it is conductive or metal-coated film. Information about anti-glare film can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Cleaning the headlamps X ! Do not clean the wiper blades too often, Clean the headlamp lenses with a wet sponge. as otherwise the coating may come off. This could cause wiper noise. ! Only use washer fluid which is suitable Cleaning the windows ! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, solvents or cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the inside of the windows. Clean the insides of the windows with a damp cloth or commercially-available glass cleaner. Avoid touching the inside of the rear windscreen and the side windows with hard objects, e.g. ice scrapers or rings. You could otherwise cause damage to the windows, rear window heating or aerial on the rear window. 212 for plastic lenses. Unsuitable washer fluid could damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps. Therefore, do not use the following: Rdry cloths Rabrasive cleaning agents Rsolvents Rcleaning agents containing solvent You could otherwise scratch or damage the surface of the lenses. Plastic trim ! Do not use dry, coarse or hard cloths and do not scrub. Doing so will scratch or damage the surfaces. X Wipe plastic parts with a damp, lint-free cloth (e.g. a microfibre cloth). X Light soiling: use a low-foaming soap (e.g. a light liquid hand soap) diluted in water. X Heavy soiling: use a cleaning agent that is solvent-free and non-corrosive. MercedesBenz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz cleaning product for this purpose. Cleaning the steering wheel boss and dashboard X Moisten a clean lint-free cloth with water. X Clean the plastic parts and the dashboard. X If particularly dirty, use a mild detergent. G Risk of injury Do not use cleaners and cockpit care sprays containing solvents to clean the cockpit and steering wheel boss. Cleaners containing solvents cause the surface to become porous and in the event of an air- 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 213 Operation Care bag being triggered, plastic parts that have become loose could cause considerable injuries. Leather upholstery* ! Cleaning RClean genuine leather covers using a damp cloth, then wipe the covers down afterwards using a dry cloth. When doing this, make sure that the leather does not become soaked. For leather care, you should use leather care foam A 001 986 59 71 10. You can purchase this, for example, at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. RClean artificial leather covers with a cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e. g. washing up liquid). RClean fabric covers with a microfibre cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e. g. washing up liquid). When cleaning, take care not to rub too vigorously and always wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards. Clean- * optional ing results depend on the type of dirt and how long it has been there. Use the chrome cleaning agent recommended by Mercedes-Benz for cleaning. Information about chrome cleaning agents can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. RClean Alcantara covers with a damp cloth. Make sure you wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. i Note that leather covers are subject to a Cleaning Distronic* natural ageing process because they are a natural product and may react in different ways (e.g. increased formation of wrinkles) to certain environmental influences (such as high humidity, intense heat). Note that regular care is essential to ensure that the quality (both appearance and comfort) of the covers is retained over time. Care of exhaust tail pipes (AMG vehicles) Impurities combined with the effects of road grit and corrosive environmental factors may cause flash rust to form on the surface. Regular care of the exhaust tail pipes will ensure that their original shine is restored. ! Do not clean exhaust tail pipes with alkaline-based cleaning agents such as wheel cleaner. 1 Distronic* cover X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock. X Clean cover 1 in the radiator grille with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. ! Do not use dry, coarse or hard cloths and do not scrub. Doing so will scratch or damage the surfaces. 213 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 214 Operation Care Cleaning Parktronic* The sensors are located in the front and rear bumpers. 1 Parktronic* sensors in the front bumper X Clean sensors 1 in the bumper with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. ! Do not use dry, coarse or hard cloths and do not scrub. You will otherwise scratch or damage the sensors. If you intend to use a high-pressure cleaner or a steam cleaner to clean the sensors, observe the instructions issued by the equipment manufacturer concerning the distance to be maintained between the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner and the vehicle. 214 * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 215 Practical advice Where will I find...? ........................... Display messages ............................. Troubleshooting ................................ Locking/unlocking in an emergency ................................................. Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head restraints .................................. Changing the batteries ..................... Changing the bulbs ........................... Replacing the wiper blades .............. Flat tyre ............................................. Battery ............................................... Jump-starting .................................... Towing and tow-starting .................. Fuses .................................................. 216 219 241 266 269 269 271 275 276 288 291 293 295 215 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 216 Practical advice Where will I find...? Where will I find...? Setting up the warning triangle Warning triangle First-aid kit i Check the expiry date of the first-aid kit annually, and replace the contents if necessary. The warning triangle is located in the luggage well under the boot floor. The first-aid kit is located in the stowage compartment under the front-passenger seat. 1 Retainer 2 Side reflectors 3 Feet 1 Warning triangle X Remove warning triangle 1. 216 X Fold feet 3 down and out to the side. X Pull side reflectors 2 upwards to form a triangle and lock them at the top using retainer 1. 1 Handle X To open: pull handle 1 up. X Fold the cover forwards. X Remove the first-aid kit. 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 217 Practical advice Where will I find...? Fire extinguisher* i Have the fire extinguisher refilled after each use and checked every one or two years. Otherwise, it may fail in an emergency. Observe the legal requirements in all countries concerned. The fire extinguisher is located in the stowage compartment underneath the driver's seat. 1 Handle X To open: pull handle 1 up. X Fold the cover forwards. X Remove the fire extinguisher. Vehicle tool kit, jack and spare wheel* The vehicle tool kit is located in a stowage compartment underneath the boot floor. X Fold up the boot floor and hook the retainer into the top of the boot frame. Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit G Risk of injury The jack is designed only to raise and hold the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed. If you are carrying out work on the vehicle, you must use stands. Make sure that the jack is placed on a firm, non-slip and level surface. Do not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restricted height. Do not start the engine at any time while a wheel is being changed. Do not lie under the vehicle when it is being supported by the jack. If you do not raise the vehicle as described, it could slip off the jack (e.g. if the engine is started or a door or the boot lid is opened or closed) and you could be seriously injured. 1 Vehicle tool kit, jack, warning triangle 2 Electric air pump 3 TIREFIT kit i When using the jack, you should also observe the safety notes in the "Flat tyre" section (Y page 276). * optional 217 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 218 Practical advice Where will I find...? Vehicles with "Minispare" emergency spare wheel*/collapsible emergency spare wheel* or a spare wheel 1 Vehicle tool kit, wheel wrench, jack 2 "Minispare" emergency spare wheel* or Removing or fitting the luggage well 1 Securing clips 2 Luggage well X To remove: unscrew securing clips 1 from the securing bolts by turning the clips anti-clockwise. X Lift up luggage well 2 in the area of securing clips 1. X Remove luggage well 2 from the boot. spare wheel* 3 Fastening element Removing the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel*/collapsible emergency spare wheel or spare wheel* X Remove the luggage well (Y page 218). X Turn fastening element 3 anti-clockwise. X Remove "Minispare" emergency spare wheel* or spare wheel* 2. 218 X To fit: insert the luggage well into the boot in such a way that securing clips 1 are roughly aligned with the securing bolts. X Press the front edge of the luggage well under the trim of the loading edge in the direction of the arrows. X Press securing clips 1 up to the stop against the securing bolts. * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 219 Practical advice Display messages Display messages Notes The on-board computer shows warnings or malfunctions in the multi-function display. Certain display messages are accompanied by a warning tone or a continuous tone. The multi-function display shows high-priority display messages in red. In the following tables, these display messages are printed in red. Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Owner's Manual. G Risk of accident No further messages can be displayed if there is a malfunction in the instrument cluster and/or the multi-function display. This means that you will not see information about the driving situation, such as the speed, outside temperature, warning/indicator lamps, display messages or system failures. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. Adjust your driving style and speed accordingly. Immediately consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safetyrelated systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the instructions provided for HOLD (Y page 144)and parking (Y page 103). The following tables contain all the display messages. Hiding display messages After a few seconds, the on-board computer automatically hides some low priority display messages. Other messages remain visible in the multi-function display until you hide them yourself. Some high priority display messages cannot be hidden. The multi-function display shows these messages continuously until the causes of the messages have been remedied. Use the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. X Use the è, ·, j or k button to select another display. The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory (Y page 121). 219 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 220 Practical advice Display messages Text messages G Risk of accident and injury Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If this work is not carried out correctly, the operating safety of your vehicle could be compromised. There is a risk of accident and injury. Display messages 120 km/h 27 Only 220 Maximum speed exceeded for certain countries. Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The maximum speed has been exceeded27. X Drive more slowly. 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 221 Practical advice Display messages Display messages ABS ABS Possible cause/consequence ABS, ESP inoperative See Owner's Manual ABS, ESP unavailable See Owner's Manual G Risk of accident ESP® ABS, and therefore also PRESAFE® are unavailable due to a malfunction. BAS has also been deactivated. The brake system is still available with complete brake boosting effect. G Risk of accident ESP® ABS, and therefore also PRESAFE® are unavailable due to undervoltage. BAS has also been deactivated. The brake system is still available with complete brake boosting effect. Possible solution X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. DISTRONIC Override Distronic* is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle. X Ease off the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC - - - An activation condition for Distronic* is not fulfilled. X If conditions permit, drive faster than 30 km/h and store the speed (Y page 135). or DISTRONIC inoperative Distronic* is faulty. X Check activation conditions for Distronic*. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z * optional 221 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 222 Practical advice Display messages Display messages DISTRONIC Possible cause/consequence currently unavailable See Owner's Manual Distronic* is deactivated and is tempora- Distronic* is available again and the display message disappears when the dirt (e.g. slush) falls off rily inoperative, if: while you are driving or if the system detects that Rthe Distronic* cover in the radiator the sensors are fully available again. grille is dirty If the display message does not disappear: Rits function is impaired due to heavy X Clean the Distronic* cover in the radiator grille rain, snow or fog. (Y page 213). Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily X If necessary, wait until the system has cooled unavailable, e.g. because of electrodown. magnetic radiation. RThe radar sensor system has not detec- X Restart the engine. ted any vehicles or stationary objects, e.g. traffic signs, for a long time. RThe ESP also lights up: v 222 inoperative See Owner's Manual Possible solution system has overheated. G Risk of accident ESP® and therefore also Brake Assist and PRE-SAFE® are unavailable due to a malfunction. The brake system is still available with complete brake boosting effect. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 223 Practical advice Display messages Display messages P Selector lever in park position Possible cause/consequence Possible solution You have switched off the engine with the KEYLESS GO button* and opened the driver's door. or With HOLD activated, you have either: X Move the selector lever to P. The engine can be started again. Ropened the driver’s door and released the seat belt or Rswitched Ropened off the engine or the bonnet The horn may also sound at regular intervals. The horn becomes louder if you attempt to lock the vehicle. The engine cannot be started. P Selector lever in park position You have tried to switch off the engine with the KEYLESS GO button* while the selector lever is in position R or D. X Move the selector lever to P. Please shift to P or N You have attempted to start the engine while the selector lever is not in position P or N. X Move the selector lever to P or N. PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's Manual PRE-SAFE® has failed. All other occupant safety systems, e.g. airbags, remain available. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. * optional Z 223 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 224 Practical advice Display messages Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution Tyre pressure is only displayed The tyre pressure monitor* is measuring after driving for a the tyre pressure. few minutes X Drive on. The tyre pressures will appear in the multifunction display after you have been driving for a few minutes. Tyre pressure the tyre pressure Vehicles with tyre pressure monitor*: the pressure of one or more tyres is too low or the tyre pressures of the individual wheels display a large discrepancy. X Check the tyre pressure at the next opportunity and correct it if necessary (Y page 200). Tyre pressure monitor inoperative The tyre pressure monitor* is malfunctioning. X Have the tyre pressure monitor* and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Tyre pressure monitor inoperative No wheel sensors The tyre pressure monitor* is deactivated because the vehicle is fitted with wheels that do not have suitable wheel sensors. X Have wheels with suitable wheel sensors fitted at a qualified specialist workshop. Once wheels with the correct wheel sensors have been fitted, the tyre pressure monitor* reactivates automatically after a few minutes of driving. 224 * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 225 Practical advice Display messages Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution Tyre press. mon. Wheel sensor missing The tyre pressure monitor* is not receiving a signal from at least one wheel because a wheel has been fitted which does not have suitable sensors (e.g. the spare wheel). Or there is a malfunction in at least one wheel sensor. A line is displayed in the multi-function display for the tyre concerned instead of the tyre pressure value. X Have the tyre pressure monitor* and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Once wheels with suitable wheel sensors have been fitted again, the tyre pressures are displayed in the multi-function display after driving for a few minutes. Tyre pressure monitor currently unavailable The tyre pressure monitor* is temporarily deactivated. The voltage of the vehicle's electrical system is too low or radio interference prevents the reception of sensor signals. X Drive on. Once the causes have been eliminated, the tyre pressure monitor* automatically reactivates after a few minutes of driving. Z * optional 225 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 226 Practical advice Display messages Display messages Tyre pressure Check tyres Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a significant pressure loss. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Check the tyres. X Check the tyre pressure and correct it if necessary (Y page 200). X Repair or change the faulty wheel as necessary (Y page 276). X Then restart the tyre pressure loss warning system once the tyre pressure is correct (Y page 201). Run Flat Indicator inoperative The tyre pressure loss warning system is deactivated due to a malfunction. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check tyres, then restart Run Flat Indicator There was a tyre pressure warning message. X Make sure that the pressure set is correct for all tyres (Y page 200). X Then restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 201). X Reactivate HOLD later. HOLD 226 off HOLD has been deactivated. The vehicle is skidding or a condition for activating SBC HOLD is no longer met when the brake pedal is firmly depressed. 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 227 Practical advice Display messages Display messages HOLD cannot be activated See Owner's Manual Possible cause/consequence Possible solution A condition for activating HOLD has not been met. Check the conditions for activating HOLD (Y page 144). X Close the bonnet. X Close the driver's door. X Start the engine. X Release the parking brake. X Switch off all consumers that are not required. HOLD can be reactivated as soon as the onboard voltage is sufficient. A malfunction has occurred. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Cruise control inoperative and SPEEDTRONIC Speedtronic and cruise control or Distronic* are not operational. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. SRS Restraint system malfunction Consult workshop The restraint systems are faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Cruise control - - - A condition for activating cruise control has not been met. X Activate ESP® (Y page 59) X If conditions permit, drive faster than 30 km/h and store the speed (Y page 132). HOLD * optional inoperative See Owner's Manual 227 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 228 Practical advice Display messages Symbol messages G Risk of accident and injury Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If this work is not carried out correctly, the operating safety of your vehicle could be compromised. There is a risk of accident and injury. Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution # The battery is not being charged. Possible causes: X Stop immediately and safely when traffic conditions allow and check the poly-V-belt. Rfaulty X If it has torn: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X If it is not damaged: have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. X Close the boot lid. X Stop the vehicle. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Close the bonnet. Rtorn alternator poly-V-belt Rmalfunction Ê Y in the electronics The boot lid is open. G Risk of accident Vehicles with an anti-theft alarm system*: you are driving with the bonnet open. 228 * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 229 Practical advice Display messages Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution V At least one door is open. The display symbol shows you which doors are open. X Close the doors. D The cooling fan for the coolant is faulty. X If the coolant temperature is less than 120†, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X In doing so, avoid heavy loads on the engine (e.g. driving in mountainous terrain) and stopand-go driving. X Do not pull away. X Wait until the display message disappears. The vehicle has reached the level required for driving. @ Vehicle rising Vehicles with AIRMATIC Dual Control*: your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected. @ Vehicle rising Please wait Vehicles with AIRMATIC Dual Control*: the vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. Z * optional 229 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 230 Practical advice Display messages Display messages @ Possible cause/consequence STOP Car too low G Risk of accident Possible solution ! Avoid large steering angles, otherwise the wing or the tyres could be damaged when you drive on. Listen for scraping sounds. AIRMATIC Dual Control* is faulty. X Do not exceed a maximum speed of 80 km/h. X Pull over and select a higher vehicle level. The vehicle may be raised, depending on the type of fault. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The AIRMATIC Dual Control* function is restricted. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. X Do not exceed a maximum speed of 80 km/h. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. @ Malfunction 2 Brake wear The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. X Have the brake pads/linings replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. 3 Brake immediately A malfunction occurred with HOLD activated. The horn may also sound at regular intervals. The horn becomes louder if you attempt to lock the vehicle. The engine cannot be started. X Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly until the warning message in the multi-function display disappears. X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before you leave it (Y page 103). The engine can be started again. 230 * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 231 Practical advice Display messages Display messages Possible cause/consequence 3 EBV, ABS, ESP inop- G Risk of accident erative See OwnEBV, ABS and ESP® are unavailable due to er's Manual a malfunction. BAS has also been deactivated. PRE-SAFE® is therefore also not operational. The brake system is still available with complete brake boosting effect. 3 Check brake fluid level ! Release parking brake [ Clean fuel filter G Risk of accident There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. You are driving with the parking brake on. Possible solution X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. X Pull over as soon as it is safe to do so. X Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Consult the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Do not top up the brake fluid. This will not rectify the malfunction. X Release the parking brake. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 231 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 232 Practical advice Display messages Display messages D D 232 Coolant Stop vehicle, turn engine off Coolant Stop vehicle, turn engine off Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The coolant is too hot. X Stop the vehicle. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Switch off the engine. X Wait until the display message disappears before restarting the engine. There is otherwise a risk of engine damage. X Observe the coolant temperature gauge. X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. X Stop the vehicle. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Switch off the engine. X Check the poly-V-belt. X If it is not damaged: do not start the engine again until the display message goes out. There is otherwise a risk of engine damage. X If it has torn: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop. The poly-V-belt may have torn. 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 233 Practical advice Display messages Display messages B . . . Top up coolant See Owner's Manual Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The coolant level is too low. X Top up the coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so (Y page 196). X Have the coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop if the coolant needs topping up more often than usual. X Halogen headlamp: replace the bulb (Y page 271). X Bi-xenon headlamp*: visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Switch the lights to manual control in the onboard computer (Y page 125). X Switch the lights on and off using the light switch. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Dipped beam, left or Dipped beam, right The right-hand or left-hand dipped-beam headlamp is faulty. AUTO lights inoperative The light sensor is faulty. Constant headlamp mode is switched on. Rear left turn signal Back-up bulb on or Rear right turn signal Back-up bulb on The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is faulty. This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed. Z * optional 233 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 234 Practical advice Display messages Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution . Turn signal in left-hand mirror or Turn signal in right-hand mirror The turn signal lamp on the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is faulty. This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. . Front left turn signal Back-up bulb on or Front right turn signal Back-up bulb on The front left-hand or right-hand turn signal is faulty. X Replace the bulb (Y page 271). . 3rd brake lamp The third brake lamp is faulty. This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. . Left brake-/tail lamp Back-up bulb on or Right brake-/tail lamp Back-up bulb on The left-hand or right-hand rear brake lamp is faulty. This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 234 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 235 Practical advice Display messages Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution . Main beam, left or Main beam, right The left-hand or right-hand main-beam headlamp is faulty. X Replace the bulb (Y page 271). . Left-hand licence plate lamp or Right-hand licence plate lamp The left-hand or right-hand licence plate lamp is faulty. X Replace the bulb (Y page 271). . Switch off lights You did not switch off the lights when leaving the vehicle. X Turn the light switch to M or U. . Front left-hand foglamp or Front right-hand foglamp The front left-hand or right-hand foglamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. . Rear left-hand foglamp or Rear right-hand foglamp The left-hand or right-hand rear foglamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 235 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 236 Practical advice Display messages Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution . Front left-hand parking lamp Backup bulb on or Front right-hand parking lamp Backup bulb on The front left-hand or right-hand parking lamp is faulty. X Replace the bulb (Y page 271). . Left-hand reversing lamp or Right-hand reversing lamp The left-hand or right-hand reversing lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. . Left-hand tail lamp Back-up bulb on or Right-hand tail lamp Back-up bulb on The left-hand or right-hand tail lamp is faulty. This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ò Replace air cleaner The engine air filter must be replaced. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 236 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 237 Practical advice Display messages Display messages N ± Possible cause/consequence Possible solution Check engine oil level when next refuelling The engine oil level has dropped to a critical level. X Check the engine oil level (Y page 195) and top up the engine oil if necessary. X Have the engine checked for leaks if the engine oil needs topping up more often than usual. Display malfunction Consult workshop One or more electronic systems are unable to deliver information to the onboard computer. The following systems may have failed: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Repair or change the tyre (Y page 276). RCoolant RRev counter RCruise H Tyre pressure Caution Tyre defect temperature gauge control or Speedtronic display One or more tyres are losing air rapidly. The affected wheel is highlighted in the tyre pressure display of the tyre pressure monitor*. Z * optional 237 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 238 Practical advice Display messages Display messages H Tyre pressure Check tyres Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly. The affected wheel is highlighted in the tyre pressure display of the tyre pressure monitor*. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Check the tyres. X Repair or change the faulty tyre if necessary (Y page 276). X Check the tyre pressure and correct it if necessary (Y page 200). The warning will disappear automatically after you have been driving for a few minutes with the corrected tyre pressure. I Change key batteries The batteries of the KEYLESS GO key* are discharged. X Change the batteries (Y page 269). I Key not detected The KEYLESS GO key* is not in the vehicle. It will no longer be possible to centrally lock the vehicle and start the engine if the engine is switched off. X Stop the vehicle. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Look for the KEYLESS GO key*. The KEYLESS GO * key is not detected while the engine is running, because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves. X Stop the vehicle. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Operate the vehicle using the key in the ignition lock if necessary. I 238 Key not detected * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 239 Practical advice Display messages Display messages I Key not detected Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The KEYLESS GO key* cannot be detected at present. X Change the location of the KEYLESS GO key* within the vehicle. X Operate the vehicle using the key in the ignition lock if necessary. I Key still in vehicle The KEYLESS GO key* was detected inside the vehicle during locking. X Remove the KEYLESS GO key* from the vehicle. I Please replace key The key no longer functions. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X inoperative Battery weak The battery voltage is insufficient. The auxiliary heating/ventilation* has switched off or cannot be switched on. X Drive for a longer distance. The battery is being charged. The auxiliary heating/ventilation* is reactivated as soon as there is sufficient battery voltage. X inoperative Refuel There is insufficient fuel in the fuel tank. The auxiliary heating* cannot be switched on. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. X inoperative See Owner's Manual The auxiliary heating* has a temporary malfunction or is faulty. X When the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down: try to switch on the auxiliary heating* four times, waiting for several minutes between each attempt. X If the auxiliary heating* does not switch on: visit a qualified specialist workshop. * optional 239 Z 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 240 Practical advice Display messages Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution W Reserve fuel level The fuel level has fallen below the reserve range. The operation of the auxiliary heating* can no longer be guaranteed. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. t Enter PIN: You have not yet logged on to your mobile phone*. X Enter the PIN for the SIM card. t Bluetooth ready The Bluetooth connection between your mobile phone and the audio system or COMAND APS* is not activated. X The Bluetooth connection between your mobile phone and the audio system or COMAND APS* is not activated, see separate operating instructions. t No telephone inserted Your mobile phone is not inserted in the bracket*. X Insert mobile phone into the bracket* (Y page 183). W Top up washer fluid The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. X Top up the washer fluid (Y page 197). 240 * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 241 Practical advice Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Points to remember G Risk of accident and injury Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If this work is not carried out correctly, the operating safety of your vehicle could be compromised. There is a risk of accident and injury. Indicator and warning lamps in switches and buttons Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions One or all of the indicator lamps There is insufficient voltage in the seat ventilation* button are because too many consumers are switched on. The seat ventilaflashing. tion* has switched itself off automatically. X Switch off consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps, interior lighting, etc. The seat ventilation* will automatically switch back on as soon as there is sufficient voltage again. One or all of the indicator lamps in the seat heating* button are flashing. X Switch off consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps, interior lighting, etc. The seat heating* will automatically switch back on as soon as there is sufficient voltage again. There is insufficient voltage because too many consumers are switched on. The seat heating* has switched itself off automatically. Z * optional 241 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 242 Practical advice Troubleshooting Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions The steering wheel heating* indi- There is insufficient voltage cator lamp on the lower left lever because too many consumers are of the steering column is flashing. switched on. The steering wheel heating* has switched itself off automatically. X Switch off consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps, interior lighting, etc. The steering wheel heating* will automatically switch back on as soon as there is sufficient voltage again. The indicator lamp in the 2 Cooling has been deactivated button on the Thermatic/4-zone due to a malfunction. Thermotronic* control panel flashes three times when you press the button. The cooling system cannot be switched on. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The indicator lamp in the ¯ There is insufficient voltage because too many consumers are rear-window heating button is flashing. The rear-window heat- switched on. ing has switched itself off prematurely or cannot be switched on. X Switch off consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps, interior lighting, etc. The rear-window heating will automatically switch back on as soon as there is sufficient voltage again. Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition on the frontpassenger seat*: The 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp on the centre console is lit. 242 A special Mercedes-Benz child seat with automatic child seat recognition has been fitted to the front-passenger seat. The frontpassenger airbag has therefore been disabled. * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 243 Practical advice Troubleshooting Problem Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition on the frontpassenger seat*: The 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp on the centre console is lit. Possible cause/consequence G Risk of injury There is no child seat fitted to the front-passenger seat. The automatic child seat recognition* is malfunctioning. Suggested solutions X RMobile RCards phones with transponders, e.g. ski passes or access passes If the 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp is still lit: X * optional Remove electronic equipment from the front-passenger seat, e.g.: RNotebooks Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 243 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 244 Practical advice Troubleshooting Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster Problem Possible cause/consequence G Risk of accident Suggested solutions X Drive on carefully. ABS is unavailable due to a malfunction. Therefore, Brake Assist, ESP®, EBV and PRE-SAFE® are, for example, also deactivated. The brake system continues to function normally, but without electronic support. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. X Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display (Y page 219). X Visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. v The yellow ESP® warning G Risk of accident lamp is lit while the engine ESP® is deactivated. ESP® will is running. not stabilise the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a wheel starts to spin. X Reactivate ESP® (Y page 59). Exceptions: (Y page 59). X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display (Y page 220). X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. - The yellow ABS warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. v The yellow ESP® warning G Risk of accident lamp is lit while the engine ESP® is unavailable due to a malis running. function. ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a wheel starts to spin. 244 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 245 Practical advice Troubleshooting Problem v The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. 3 The red brake system warning lamp comes on while you are driving. You will also hear a warning tone. 3 The red brake system warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. You will also hear a warning tone. l The red distance warning lamp* lights up while the vehicle is in motion. * optional Possible cause/consequence G Risk of accident ESP® or traction control has intervened because at least one wheel has started to spin. Cruise control or Distronic* is deactivated. You are driving with the parking brake applied. G Risk of accident There is insufficient brake fluid in the fluid reservoir. G Risk of accident Suggested solutions X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. X Release the accelerator pedal while you are driving. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X Do not deactivate ESP®. Exceptions: (Y page 59). X Release the parking brake. The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases. X Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. X Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display (Y page 219). X Under no circumstances should you top up the brake fluid. This will not rectify the fault. X Increase the distance. The distance to the vehicle in front is too short for the speed selected. Z 245 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 246 Practical advice Troubleshooting Problem l The red distance warning lamp* lights up while the vehicle is in motion. You will also hear a warning tone. D The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. D The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. 246 Possible cause/consequence G Risk of accident Suggested solutions X Be prepared to brake immediately. You are approaching a vehicle in front at too great a speed or Distronic* has detected a stationary obstacle in your line of travel. X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take evasive action. There is insufficient coolant in the expansion tank. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Allow the engine and coolant to cool. X Check the coolant level. Observe the warning notes (Y page 196). Top up the coolant if necessary. X Have the coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop if the coolant needs topping up more often than usual. X If the coolant temperature is less than 120†, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X In doing so, avoid heavy loads on the engine (e.g. driving in mountainous terrain) and stop-and-go driving. If the coolant level is correct, the radiator fan may be faulty. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 247 Practical advice Troubleshooting Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions D The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. You will also hear a warning tone. The coolant level is too low. The coolant temperature has exceeded 120 †. The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged. X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Allow the engine and coolant to cool. X Check the coolant level. Observe the warning notes (Y page 196). Top up the coolant if necessary. X Have the coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop if the coolant needs topping up more often than usual. If the coolant level is correct, the radiator fan may be faulty. The coolant temperature has exceeded 120 †. The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged. X Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ± The yellow engine diagnos- Vehicles with a diesel engine: the tics warning lamp comes fuel tank has run dry. on while the engine is running. X Start the engine three to four times after refuelling. Emergency running mode is cancelled. The vehicle need not be checked. D The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. You will also hear a warning tone. Z 247 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 248 Practical advice Troubleshooting Problem Possible cause/consequence ± The yellow engine diagnos- There may be a malfunction: tics warning lamp comes Rin the fuel injection system on while the engine is runRin the exhaust system ning. Rin the ignition system (on vehicles with a petrol engine) Suggested solutions X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display (Y page 219). The warning light will go out after the flat tyre has been changed and you have been driving for a few minutes. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency mode. H The yellow tyre pressure monitor* warning lamp is on. G Risk of accident The tyre pressure monitor* has detected a sudden or significant pressure loss in at least one of the tyres. 1 The red SRS warning lamp G Risk of injury is lit while the engine is The restraint systems are faulty. running. The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, not be triggered at all. 248 * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 249 Practical advice Troubleshooting Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions < The red seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds after the engine starts up28. The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 88). < After the engine starts you G Risk of injury will hear a warning tone for The driver's seat belt is not fasup to 6 seconds28. tened. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 88). The warning tone ceases. < The red seat belt warning G Risk of injury lamp lights up after startThe driver or front passenger has ing the engine, as soon as not fastened their seat belt. the driver's door or the front-passenger door is G Risk of injury closed. There are objects on the frontpassenger seat. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 88). The warning lamp goes out. X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them safely. The warning lamp goes out. Z 28 Only for certain countries. 249 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 250 Practical advice Troubleshooting Problem Possible cause/consequence < The red seat belt warning G Risk of injury lamp flashes and you hear The driver or front passenger has an intermittent warning not fastened their seat belt and tone. you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have driven faster than 25 km/h for a short time. G Risk of injury Suggested solutions X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 88). The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them safely. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. There are objects on the frontpassenger seat and you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have driven faster than 25 km/h for a short time. W The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. 250 The fuel level has fallen below the reserve range. The operation of the auxiliary heating* can no longer be guaranteed. * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 251 Practical advice Troubleshooting Warning tones Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions The anti-theft alarm system* is suddenly triggered. You have opened the vehicle using the emergency key element without deactivating the antitheft alarm system* first. X Switch off the alarm (Y page 61). You hear a warning tone. A message appears in the multifunction display. X See the explanations for the display message (Y page 219). You hear a warning tone. You are driving with the parking brake applied. X Release the parking brake. You hear a warning tone. You have opened the driver's door and forgotten to switch off the lights. X Turn the light switch to M or U. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 88). X Deactivate HOLD (Y page 145). You hear a warning tone. G Risk of injury The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. You hear a continuous tone. * optional You have switched off the engine and opened the bonnet or the driver's door with Hold activated. 251 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 252 Practical advice Troubleshooting Accident Problem Fuel is leaking from the vehicle. Possible cause/consequence G Risk of fire The fuel line or the fuel tank has been damaged. Suggested solutions X Switch off the ignition immediately. X Remove the ignition key. X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. The leaking fuel creates a risk of fire or explosion. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. You are unable to determine the extent of the damage. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. You cannot detect any damage. X Start the engine as normal. X Reset the NECK-PRO head restraints (Y page 269). The NECK-PRO head restraints on the driver's and frontpassenger seats have been triggered. 252 Your vehicle has been involved in a rear-end collision. 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 253 Practical advice Troubleshooting Fuel and fuel tank Problem Fuel is leaking from the vehicle. Possible cause/consequence G Risk of fire The fuel line or the fuel tank is defective. Suggested solutions X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock immediately and remove it. X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. The leaking fuel creates a risk of fire or explosion. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The fuel filler flap cannot be opened. The fuel filler flap is not released. X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 266). The opening mechanism is jammed. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Z 253 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 254 Practical advice Troubleshooting Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions The fuel tank has been run completely dry on a vehicle with a diesel engine. There is air in the fuel system. X Refuel the vehicle. X Switch on the ignition for approximately 10 seconds (key in position 2 in the ignition lock). X Start the engine continuously for up to 40 seconds until it runs smoothly. The fuel system is now free of air. If the engine does not start: X Wait two minutes. X Repeat the starting procedure for up to 40 seconds. If the engine still does not start: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 254 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 255 Practical advice Troubleshooting Engine Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions The engine will not start. HOLD is activated. X Deactivating HOLD (Y page 145). X Start the engine again. RThere X Turn the key back to position 0 in the ignition lock before the next starting attempt. RThere X Try to start the engine again (Y page 101). When doing so, remember that excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine will drain the battery. The engine will not start. You can hear the starter motor operating. may be a malfunction in the engine electronics. may be a malfunction in the fuel supply. If the engine does not start after several attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicles with a diesel engine: The fuel tank has been run dry. The engine will not start. You can hear the starter motor operating. The reserve fuel warning lamp is on and the fuel gauge shows 0. X Refuel the vehicle. X Bleed the fuel system (Y page 254). The engine will not start. You can- The on-board voltage is too low X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 291). not hear the starter motor oper- because the starter battery is too If the engine does not start despite attempting to jump-start it: ating. weak or discharged. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Z 255 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 256 Practical advice Troubleshooting Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions Vehicles with a petrol engine: The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring. The engine electronics or a mechanical component of the engine control unit have been damaged. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter and damage it. A coolant temperature of over 120 °C is displayed. The coolant warning lamp may also be on and a warning tone may sound (Y page 110). The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to cool down. X Check the coolant level (Y page 196). Observe the warning notes as you do so and top up the coolant if necessary. If the coolant level is correct, the radiator fan may be faulty. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X If the coolant temperature is less than 120°C, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. when driving on mountain roads and stop/start driving. 256 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 257 Practical advice Troubleshooting Automatic transmission Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions The transmission has problems shifting gear The transmission is losing oil. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The acceleration ability is deteriorating. The transmission no longer changes gear. The transmission is in emergency mode. It is only possible to shift into 2nd gear and reverse gear. X Stop the vehicle. X Move the selector lever to P. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock. X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine. X Move the selector lever to position D or R. If D is selected, the transmission shifts into 2nd gear; if R is selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. 257 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 258 Practical advice Troubleshooting Parktronic* Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions Only the red segments in the Parktronic has malfunctioned Parktronic warning display are lit. and has switched itself off. You also hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. Parktronic is deactivated after approximately 20 seconds and the indicator lamp in the Parktronic button lights up. X If problems persist, have Parktronic checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Only the red segments in the The Parktronic sensors are dirty Parktronic warning display are lit. or there is interference. Parktronic is deactivated after approximately 20 seconds. X Clean the Parktronic sensors (Y page 214). X Switch the ignition back on. Only the red segments in the The problem may be caused by an Parktronic warning display are lit. external source of radio or ultraParktronic is deactivated after sound waves. approximately 20 seconds. X See if Parktronic functions in a different location. 258 * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 259 Practical advice Troubleshooting Headlamps and turn signals Problem Possible cause/consequence The headlamps or the turn signals Air humidity is very high. in the exterior mirrors are misted up on the inside. The headlamp housing is not sealed and moisture has been able to enter. Suggested solutions X Drive with the headlamps switched on. The headlamps are demisted after a short distance. X Have the headlamps checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Windscreen wipers Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions The windscreen wipers are jammed. Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windscreen wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated. X For safety reasons, you should remove the key from the ignition lock. X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windscreen wipers back on. The windscreen wiper drive is malfunctioning. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Have the windscreen wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop. The windscreen wipers fail completely. 259 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 260 Practical advice Troubleshooting Windows Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions A side window will not close. An object is blocking the side window and preventing it from closing. X Remove the object(s). X Close the side window. You cannot see the cause. X Close the side window with increased force or without the antientrapment feature (Y page 99). Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions Mirrors Problem An exterior mirror has been pushed out of position. Vehicles with exterior mirrors that cannot be folded in/out electrically: X Push the mirror into the correct position manually. Vehicles with electrically folding exterior mirrors*: X 260 Press the mirror-folding button* (Y page 84) repeatedly until you hear a distinct click. The mirror housing is engaged again and you can adjust the mirror as usual (Y page 84). * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 261 Practical advice Troubleshooting Key Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions You cannot lock or unlock the vehicle using the key. The key batteries are discharged or nearly discharged. X Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from close range and try to open the vehicle again. If this does not work: X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element (Y page 266). X Check the key batteries (Y page 270) and replace them if necessary (Y page 270). X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element (Y page 266). X Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop. The battery charge indicator lamp The key batteries are discharged. of the key does not go on during the test. X Change the batteries (Y page 270). You have lost a key. X Have the key cancelled at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the manual locks changed too. X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the manual locks changed too. The key is faulty. You have lost the emergency key element. Z 261 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 262 Practical advice Troubleshooting Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions The key cannot be turned in the ignition lock. The key has been in position 0 for a considerable time. X Remove the key and reinsert it into the ignition lock. X Check the starter battery and recharge it if necessary (Y page 290). X Start the engine. X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating* or interior lighting, and try to turn the key again. The on-board voltage is too low. If this does not work: X Check the starter battery and recharge it if necessary (Y page 290). or X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 291). or X 262 Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 263 Practical advice Troubleshooting KEYLESS GO* Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions You cannot lock or unlock the vehicle using the KEYLESS GO key. The KEYLESS GO key batteries are discharged or nearly discharged. X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the key. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from close range and try to open the vehicle again. If this does not work: X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element (Y page 266). X Check the KEYLESS GO key batteries (Y page 270) and replace them if necessary (Y page 270). X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the key. To do this, point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from close range and try to open the vehicle again. X Have the KEYLESS GO key checked at a qualified specialist workshop. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element (Y page 266). The KEYLESS GO key batteries are discharged. X Change the batteries (Y page 270). There is a fault with KEYLESS GO. The battery check lamp in the KEYLESS GO key does not light up when tested. Z * optional 263 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 264 Practical advice Troubleshooting Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions The vehicle cannot be started A door is open. The key therefore using the KEYLESS GO key and cannot be detected so easily. the KEYLESS GO button. The KEYYou did not depress the brake LESS GO key is in the vehicle. when starting the engine. X Close the door and try to start the vehicle again. X Depress the brake and press the KEYLESS GO button. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. X Start your vehicle using the KEYLESS GO key in the ignition lock. X Have the KEYLESS GO key cancelled at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the manual locks changed too. You have lost the KEYLESS GO key. Auxiliary heating/ventilation* Problem Possible cause/consequence X Refuel at the nearest filling station. The battery is not sufficiently charged. X Charge the battery. The auxiliary heating is faulty. X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist workshop. The auxiliary heating is not work- The fuel level is down to the ing. reserve level. 264 Suggested solutions * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 265 Practical advice Troubleshooting Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions The auxiliary heating cannot be switched on or off using the remote control. The remote control display shows FAIL and the ¢ symbol. The signal transmission between the remote control and the vehicle is faulty. X Change your position in relation to the vehicle, moving closer if necessary. X Make another attempt to switch the auxiliary heating on or off using the remote control. The remote control display shows FAIL and the ¡ symbol. There is not enough fuel in the tank, or the auxiliary heating is faulty. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions Parking up the vehicle Problem The vehicle is to be left parked up for longer than six weeks. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice. X Disconnect the battery (Y page 290). 265 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 266 Practical advice Locking/unlocking in an emergency Locking/unlocking in an emergency Emergency key Releasing and removing the emergency key element If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked or locked with the key or the KEYLESS GO key*, use the emergency key element. If you use the emergency key element to unlock and open the driver's door or the boot lid, the anti-theft alarm system* will be triggered (Y page 61). There are several ways to turn off the alarm: X Press the k or j button on the key. or X Insert the key into the ignition lock. or X or X Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS GO*. If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked centrally with the key or the KEYLESS GO key*: X Remove the emergency key element from the key (Y page 266). 1 Release catch 2 Emergency key element X Press the KEYLESS GO button* (Y page 74). Unlocking the vehicle Push release catch 1 in the direction of the arrow and at the same time remove emergency key element 2 from the key. $ To unlock X Insert the emergency key element fully into the lock of the driver's door. X Turn the emergency key element anticlockwise to position $. The door is unlocked. i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the emergency key element clockwise. X 266 Turn the emergency key element back and remove it. * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 267 Practical advice Locking/unlocking in an emergency Locking the vehicle If the vehicle can no longer be locked centrally with the key or the KEYLESS GO key*: X Open the driver's door. X Insert the emergency key element fully into the lock of the driver's door. X Turn the emergency key element clockwise as far as it will go to position $. Close the front-passenger door, the rear doors and the boot lid. i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the X Press the central locking button (Y page 70). X Turn the emergency key element back and remove it. X Check whether the locking knobs on the doors are still visible. Press the locking knobs down by hand if necessary. X Check whether the doors and the boot lid are locked. X Remove the emergency key element from the key (Y page 266). X emergency key element anti-clockwise. Opening the boot To unlock the boot Boot lock $ To unlock the boot X Insert the emergency key element fully into the boot lock. X Turn the emergency key element anticlockwise as far as it will go to position $ and pull the boot lid handle. The boot is unlocked. X Turn the emergency key element back and remove it. ! The boot lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is enough space above the boot lid. If the boot can no longer be unlocked with the key or the KEYLESS GO key*: X Remove the emergency key element from the key (Y page 266). $ To lock * optional 267 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 268 Practical advice Locking/unlocking in an emergency Opening the boot manually (remote boot lid closing feature*) 1 Recess To open the boot lid 1 Handle X X Pull the boot lid down using recess 1. X If necessary, close the boot lid from the outside by pushing down the edge. Lift the boot lid by handle 1. Closing the boot manually (remote boot lid closing feature*) G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped as you close the boot lid. Releasing the parking lock manually In the event of an electrical fault, it is possible to release the selector lever lock manually to move it out of position P, e.g. if you wish to tow the vehicle away. To release the parking lock manually 1 Selector lever cover 2 Release button X Depress the parking brake firmly. X Press selector lever cover 1 to the right and remove it upwards. X Press release button 2 down and simultaneously move the selector lever out of position P. The selector lever can now be moved freely until it is returned to position P. i Do not leave the key in the boot. You could otherwise lock yourself out. 268 * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 269 Practical advice Changing the batteries Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head restraints If the NECK-PRO head restraints are triggered in an accident, you must reset the head restraints on the driver's and front-passenger seats. Otherwise, the additional protection will not be available in the event of another rear-end collision. You can recognise when head restraints have been triggered by the fact that they have been moved forwards and can no longer be adjusted. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have NECK-PRO head restraints checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a MercedesBenz Service Centre, following a rear-end collision. i If you have problems resetting the head restraints, have this work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Changing the batteries Notes It is advisable to have the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G Risk of poisoning 1 Resetting tool 2 To press back head restraint cushion 3 Guide X Take resetting tool 1 out of the glove compartment. X Insert resetting tool 1 into guide 3 between the head restraint cushion and the rear head restraint cover. X Press resetting tool 1 downwards until you hear the head restraint deployment mechanism engage. X Pull out resetting tool 1. X Firmly press back head restraint cushion 2 until it engages. X Repeat this procedure for the second head restraint. Batteries contain toxic and caustic substances. For this reason, keep batteries away from children. If a battery is swallowed, consult a doctor immediately. H Environmental note Do not dispose of batteries with the household rubbish. They contain highly toxic substances. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, or to a special collection point for old batteries. 269 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 270 Practical advice Changing the batteries Key or KEYLESS GO key* X Checking the batteries X Press the j or k button. The batteries are in order if the battery charge indicator lamp lights up briefly. X Insert emergency key element 1 into the opening in the key and push in the direction of the arrow. Battery tray 2 is released. Auxiliary heating* remote control One 6V pin battery, type 2CR11108 is required. Pull battery tray 2 out of the key. Changing the batteries You require two CR 2025 3V cell batteries. X Remove the emergency key element from the key (Y page 266). 1 Battery 2 Battery cover 1 Batteries 1 Emergency key element 2 Battery tray 270 X Prise apart the side arms of battery cover 2 and slide off battery cover 2. X Remove old battery 1. X Insert the new battery. Observe the polarity signs on the back of the remote control when doing so. Push the battery tray back into the key housing until the battery tray engages. X Slide battery cover 2 back onto the remote control. Check the function of all key buttons on the vehicle. X Use the remote control to check the vehicle's auxiliary heating functions. X Remove old batteries 1 from the battery tray. X Insert the new batteries beneath the contact spring with the positive terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so. X X * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 271 Practical advice Changing the bulbs Changing the bulbs Notes on changing bulbs Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that all bulbs function correctly at all times. G Risk of injury Bulbs and lamps can be very hot. You should therefore allow them to cool down before you change them. Otherwise, you could be burned if you touch them. Keep bulbs out of the reach of children. Otherwise, they could damage them, for example, and injure themselves. Never use a bulb which has been dropped. Such a bulb may explode and injure you. H7 bulbs are pressurised and could explode when you change them, particularly if they are very hot. You should therefore wear eye protection and gloves when you are changing them. G Risk of injury Xenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You could get an electric shock and be seriously or even fatally injured if you touch the electric contacts on xenon bulbs. Therefore, never remove the cover from xenon bulbs. Do not change xenon bulbs yourself, but have them replaced at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Do not change the LEDs yourself. You could otherwise damage the LEDs or parts of the vehicle. Overview G Risk of injury HiP bulbs are pressurised and may explode when you change them, thereby injuring you. Do not change HiP bulbs yourself; have them replaced at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. 271 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 272 Practical advice Changing the bulbs Front bulbs Rear bulbs Bulb Type 1 Additional turn signal lamp LEDs29 2 Turn signal lamp PY 21 W 3 4 Dipped-beam headlamp Main-beam headlamp Bulb Type 6 Third brake lamp LED29 7 Rear foglamp HiP29 Front foglamp Side lamp/park- HiP29 ing lamp Reversing lamp HiP29 H7 55 W Brake lamp HiP29 or LED*29 Turn signal lamp HiP29 H11 55 W29 8 Licence plate lighting You can replace the following bulbs: RDipped-beam headlamps (vehicles with halogen headlamps) RMain-beam H7 55 W30 or D1S 35 W*31 Side lamp/park- W 5 W ing lamp 5 Before changing bulbs C5W headlamps RSide lamp and parking lamp RTurn signal lamp (front) RLicence plate lighting Observe the following points: RUse only the bulb types specified here. RTo prevent a short-circuit, switch off the lights before changing a bulb. ROnly hold bulbs with a clean, lint-free cloth. RDo not work with wet or greasy fingers. RIf the new bulb still does not light up, consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. i Have the headlamp setting checked regularly at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. 29 These bulbs must be replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. with halogen headlamps 31 Vehicles with bi-xenon headlamps*: always have these bulbs changed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. 30 Vehicles 272 * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 273 Practical advice Changing the bulbs Changing the front bulbs X Insert bulb holder 6 into the headlamp and turn it clockwise until it engages. X Place housing cover 2 back on and turn it clockwise until it engages. Replacing the bulbs in the main-beam headlamps Halogen or bi-xenon* headlamps 1 Bulb holder for turn signal 2 Housing cover for dipped-beam headlamp (halogen/bi-xenon headlamps) 3 Housing cover for main-beam headlamp/ side lamp * optional Halogen headlamps 4 Bulb holder for main-beam headlamp 5 Bulb holder for side lamp 6 Bulb holder for dipped-beam headlamp Replacing dipped-beam headlamps (vehicles with halogen headlamps) X Switch off the lights. X Open the bonnet. X Turn housing cover 2 anti-clockwise and remove it. X Turn bulb holder 6 anti-clockwise until it is released. X Pull out bulb holder6 X Change the bulb. X Switch off the lights. X Open the bonnet. X Turn housing cover 3 anti-clockwise and remove it. X Turn bulb holder 4 anti-clockwise and remove it together with the bulb. X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder 4. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder 4. X Insert bulb holder 4 into the headlamp and turn it clockwise until it engages. X Place housing cover 3 back on and turn it clockwise until it engages. Changing the bulbs in the side lamps and parking lamps X Switch off the lights. X Open the bonnet. Z 273 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 274 Practical advice Changing the bulbs X Turn housing cover 3 anti-clockwise and remove it. X X Turn main-beam headlamp bulb holder 4 anti-clockwise until it disengages and then remove it together with the bulb. X X Turn the bulb anti-clockwise, applying slight pressure, and remove it from bulb holder 5. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder 5 and turn it clockwise. X Pull out bulb holder 5. X Insert main-beam headlamp bulb holder 4 into the headlamp and turn it clockwise until it engages. X Place housing cover 3 back on and turn it clockwise until it engages. Replacing the turn signal lamps X Switch off the lights. X Open the bonnet. X Turn bulb holder 1 anti-clockwise and remove it along with the bulb. X Turn the bulb anti-clockwise, applying slight pressure, and remove it from bulb holder 1. 274 Insert the new bulb into bulb holder 1 and turn it clockwise. Insert bulb holder 1 into the headlamp and turn it clockwise until it engages. Changing the rear bulbs Replacing the licence plate lamp Licence plate lighting 1 Screws X Switch off the lights. X Open the boot lid. X Remove screws 1. X Remove licence plate lamp . X Replace the bulb. X Insert licence plate lamp . X Replace and tighten the screws 1. 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 275 Practical advice Replacing the wiper blades Replacing the wiper blades G Risk of accident The windscreen will no longer be properly wiped if the wiper blades are worn. This may prevent you from observing the traffic conditions, thereby causing an accident. Replace the wiper blades twice a year, ideally in spring and autumn. G Risk of accident The wiper arms could start moving and cause an injury if you leave the windscreen wipers switched on. Remove the key from the ignition lock before replacing the wiper blades. Removing Vehicles without KEYLESS GO* X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Set the windscreen wipers to position u (Y page 98) on the combination switch. X When the wiper arms have reached a vertical position, turn the key to position 0 and remove it from the ignition lock. X Fold the wiper arm away from the windscreen until it engages. X Set the wiper blade at right angles to the wiper arm. X When the wiper arms have reached a vertical position, press the KEYLESS GO button again. X Fold the wiper arm away from the windscreen until it engages. X Set the wiper blade at right angles to the wiper arm. X Remove the wiper blade from the retainer on the wiper arm in the direction of the arrow. ! Make sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the windscreen wiper to avoid damaging the windscreen wiper blades. * optional Vehicles with KEYLESS GO* X Switch off the engine. X Take your foot off the brake pedal. X Set the windscreen wipers to position u (Y page 98) on the combination switch. X Press the KEYLESS GO button repeatedly until the windscreen wipers start. 275 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 276 Practical advice Flat tyre Fitting X Slide the new wiper blade into the retainer on the wiper arm in the opposite direction to the arrow. X Turn the wiper blade parallel to the wiper arm. X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windscreen. Flat tyre Your vehicle may be equipped with: Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 217) Ra "Minispare" emergency spare wheel* (Y page 218) collapsible emergency spare wheel* (Y page 218) All occupants must get out of the vehicle. Make sure that they are not endangered as they do so. X Make sure that no one is near the danger area whilst a wheel is being changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting in the wheel change should, for example, stand behind the barrier. X Switch off the engine. X Remove the key from the ignition lock. X Place the warning triangle (Y page 216) or warning lamps at a suitable distance. Observe legal requirements. Ra Ra spare wheel* (Y page 218) Rthe MOExtended run-flat system* (Y page 287) Preparing the vehicle i Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehicles with MOE tyres*. 276 X X Stop your vehicle as far away from traffic as possible on solid, non-slippery, level ground. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. X Firmly depress the parking brake. X Move the selector lever to P. G Risk of injury The jack is designed only to raise the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed. If you intend to work under the vehicle, it must be placed on stands. Make sure that the jack is placed on a firm, non-slip, level surface. Do not use wooden blocks or similar as jacking supports. Otherwise, the jack will not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restricted height. * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 277 Practical advice Flat tyre Do not start the engine at any time while the wheel is being changed. Do not lie under the vehicle when it is being supported by the jack. If you do not raise the vehicle as described, it could slip off the jack (e.g. if the engine is started or a door or the boot lid are opened or closed) and you could be seriously injured. sary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not remove any foreign objects which have penetrated the tyre, e.g. screws or nails. X Remove TIREFIT, the accompanying "max. 80 km/h" sticker and the electric air pump from the stowage well underneath the boot floor (Y page 217). Using the TIREFIT kit You can use the TIREFIT kit to seal small punctures, particularly those in the tyre tread. You can use TIREFIT in outdoor temperatures down to -20 °C. G Risk of accident In the following situations, your safety is at particular risk and TIREFIT is unable to provide breakdown assistance: Rif there are cuts or punctures in the tyre greater than 4 mm Rif X Affix part 1 of the sticker within the driver's field of vision. X Affix part 2 of the sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tyre. G Risk of injury TIREFIT must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing. RIf TIREFIT comes into contact with your eyes or skin, immediately rinse thoroughly with clean water. RChange out of clothing which has come into contact with TIREFIT immediately. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, consult a doctor immediately. Keep TIREFIT away from children. RIf TIREFIT is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly with water and drink plenty of water. RDo not induce vomiting. Consult a doctor immediately. the wheel rim is damaged RDo you have driven at very low tyre pressures or on a flat tyre not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Rif Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the neces- i If TIREFIT leaks out, allow it to dry. It can then be removed like a layer of film. 1 Driver's field of vision sticker 2 Wheel sticker Z 277 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 278 Practical advice Flat tyre If you get TIREFIT on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethylene. Version 1 G Risk of injury X Screw air pump hose 6 onto flange 7 of TIREFIT sealant filler bottle 1. X Place TIREFIT sealant filler bottle 1 head downwards into recess 3 of the electric air pump. Comply with the manufacturer's safety instructions shown on the sticker on the electric air pump. i Your vehicle may be equipped with one of two different air pumps. Version 1 can be identified by the flap, behind which the hose with the pressure gauge and cable are located; version 2 has a pressure gauge integrated in the electric air pump. 278 Version 1 1 TIREFIT sealant filler bottle 2 Flap 3 Recess 4 On/off switch 5 Electric connector with cable 8 Filler hose 9 Valve 6 Air pump hose 7 Flange X X Open flap 2 on the electric air pump. X Pull connector 5 and air pump hose 6 from the housing. Remove the cap from valve 9 on the faulty tyre. 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 279 Practical advice Flat tyre X Press on/off switch 4 on the electric air pump to I. The electric air pump is switched on. The tyre is inflated. i First, TIREFIT is pumped into the tyre. The pressure can briefly rise to around 5 bar. Do not switch off the electric pump during this phase. a Pressure release screw b Pressure gauge X Make sure pressure release screw a on pressure gauge b is fully closed. X Screw filler hose 8 onto valve 9. X Insert plug 5 into the socket of the cigarette lighter* (Y page 181) or into a 12V power socket in your vehicle (Y page 182). X Turn the key to position 1 (Y page 74) in the ignition lock. * optional X Let the electric pump run for five minutes. The tyre should then have a pressure of at least 1.8 bar. ! Do not operate the electric air pump for longer than six minutes without a break. Otherwise, it may overheat. The air pump can be operated again once it has cooled down. If a pressure of 1.8 bar is not reached after five minutes: X Switch off and disconnect the electric air pump and drive the vehicle forwards or backwards approximately 10 m. This distributes the TIREFIT more evenly. X Remove TIREFIT filler bottle 1 from the electric pump. X Pump up the tyre again. G Risk of accident If a pressure of 1.8 bar is not achieved after five minutes, the tyre is too badly damaged. Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safetyrelated systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If a tyre pressure of 1.8 bar is reached: X Press on/off switch 4 on the electric air pump to 0. The electric air pump is switched off. X Disconnect the electric air pump and stow it away. X Fold up the warning triangle and stow it away. X Pull away immediately. This distributes the TIREFIT more evenly around the tyre. X Stop after driving for approximately ten minutes and check the tyre pressure with the electric air pump. 279 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 280 Practical advice Flat tyre G Risk of accident If the tyre pressure is now lower than 1.3 bar, the tyre is too badly damaged. Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safetyrelated systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. X If the tyre pressure is still at least 1.3 bar, correct it (see fuel filler flap for values). To increase the tyre pressure: switch on the electric air pump. To reduce the tyre pressure: open pressure release screw a on pressure gauge b. X Drive to the nearest workshop and have the tyre changed there. X Have the TIREFIT kit replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. 280 G Risk of accident Version 2 Do not exceed the maximum speed of 80 km/h. The “max. 80 km/h” sticker must be affixed within the driver's field of vision. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. H Environmental note Have the used TIREFIT kit disposed of professionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X Have the TIREFIT kit replaced every four years at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. 1 TIREFIT sealant filler bottle 2 Recess 3 On/off switch 4 Electric connector with cable 5 Air pump hose 6 Flange X Pull connector with cable 4 and air pump hose 5 from the housing. X Screw air pump hose 5 onto flange 6 of TIREFIT filler bottle 1. X Place TIREFIT sealant filler bottle 1 head downwards into recess 2 of the electric air pump. 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 281 Practical advice Flat tyre X Press on/off switch 3 on the electric air pump to I. The electric air pump is switched on. The tyre is inflated. i First, TIREFIT is pumped into the tyre. The pressure can briefly rise to around 5 bar. Do not switch off the electric pump during this phase. 7 Valve 8 Filler hose X Remove the cap from valve 7 on the faulty tyre. X Screw filler hose 8 onto valve 7. X Insert plug 4 into the socket of the cigarette lighter* (Y page 181) or into a 12V power socket in your vehicle (Y page 182). X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. * optional X Let the electric pump run for five minutes. The tyre should then have a pressure of at least 1.8 bar. ! Do not operate the electric air pump for longer than six minutes without a break. Otherwise, it may overheat. The air pump can be operated again once it has cooled down. If a pressure of 1.8 bar is not reached after five minutes: X Switch off and disconnect the electric air pump and drive the vehicle forwards or backwards approximately 10 m. This distributes the TIREFIT more evenly. X Remove TIREFIT filler bottle 1 from the electric pump. X Pump up the tyre again. G Risk of accident If a pressure of 1.8 bar is not achieved after five minutes, the tyre is too badly damaged. Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safetyrelated systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If a tyre pressure of 1.8 bar is reached: X Press on/off switch 3 on the electric air pump to 0. The electric air pump is switched off. X Disconnect the electric air pump and stow it away. X Fold up the warning triangle and stow it away. X Pull away immediately. This distributes the TIREFIT more evenly around the tyre. X Stop after driving for approximately ten minutes and check the tyre pressure with the electric air pump. 281 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 282 Practical advice Flat tyre G Risk of accident If the tyre pressure is now lower than 1.3 bar, the tyre is too badly damaged. Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safetyrelated systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. To increase the tyre pressure: switch on the electric air pump. To reduce the tyre pressure: press yellow pressure release button 9 next to pressure gauge a. X Drive to the nearest workshop and have the tyre changed there. X Have the TIREFIT kit replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G Risk of accident Do not exceed the maximum speed of 80 km/h. The “max. 80 km/h” sticker must be affixed within the driver's field of vision. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. H Environmental note 9 Pressure release button a Pressure gauge X If the tyre pressure is still at least 1.3 bar, correct it (see fuel filler flap for values). 282 Have the used TIREFIT kit disposed of professionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X Have the TIREFIT kit replaced every four years at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Changing a wheel and fitting the spare wheel* G Risk of accident The wheel dimensions and tyre size of the spare wheel*, the emergency spare wheel* and standard wheels may differ from one another. Your vehicle's handling characteristics will be altered when a "Minispare"/collapsible emergency spare wheel* is fitted. Adapt your style of driving accordingly. The “Minispare”/collapsible emergency spare wheel* must only be used as a temporary measure. Do not exceed the maximum speed of 80 km/h and do not deactivate ESP®. Never drive the vehicle with more than one “Minispare”/collapsible emergency spare wheel* fitted. G Risk of accident Have the “Minispare”/collapsible emergency spare wheel* or the spare wheel* replaced with a new wheel as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 283 Practical advice Flat tyre required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. X On downhill gradients: place chocks or similar under both wheels of the other axle. Raising the vehicle The jacking points for the jack are located behind the wheel housings of the front wheels and in front of the wheel housings of the rear wheels. Preparing the vehicle X Prepare the vehicle as described (Y page 276). X Place the wheels in the straight-ahead position. X Take the following from the stowage well beneath the boot floor: Rthe "Minispare"/collapsible emergency spare wheel* or the spare wheel* X Rthe vehicle tool kit Rthe wheel chock Rthe jack Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. On level ground: place chocks or similar under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change. * optional It is thus important to ensure that the jack is positioned correctly in the respective jacking points. Before positioning the jack, remove any dirt that may have collected in the jacking points. 1 Wheel wrench X Using wheel wrench 1, loosen the bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely. G Risk of accident If you fail to position the jack correctly, the vehicle may: Rslip off the jack Rinjure Rbe 1 Jacking point 2 Jack 3 Crank X Position jack 2 at jacking point 1. you or others damaged 283 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 284 Practical advice Flat tyre G Risk of accident X Make sure that the base of the jack is positioned directly under jacking point 1. X Turn crank 3 until the tyre is raised a maximum of 3 cm from the ground. X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely. 1 Centring pin X X In place of the wheel bolt, screw centring pin 1 from the vehicle tool kit into the thread. Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully. ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface. This could cause damage to the bolt and wheel hub threads. X Remove the wheel. Fitting a new wheel G Risk of accident Replace damaged or corroded wheel bolts. Never oil or grease wheel bolts. 284 If a wheel hub thread is damaged, you must not drive the vehicle any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. MercedesBenz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or Service 24h for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident Only use wheel bolts that have been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Other bolts could work loose. Do not tighten the wheel bolts completely while the vehicle is still jacked up. The vehicle could topple off the jack. 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 285 Practical advice Flat tyre X Place the "Minispare"/collapsible emergency spare wheel* or the spare wheel onto the centring pin and push it on. X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-tight. X Unscrew the centring pin. X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is fingertight. The electric air pump is located in the stowage well under the boot floor. X Take the electric air pump out of the stowage well under the boot floor. 1 Wheel bolts for all wheels supplied by the factory X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces. 1 Flap 2 On/off switch 3 Electric connector with cable 4 Air pump hose with pressure gauge and pressure release screw 5 Union nut Inflating the collapsible emergency spare wheel* with the electric air pump G Risk of accident Pump up the collapsible emergency spare wheel before lowering the vehicle, as you could otherwise damage the wheel rim. * optional X Open flap 1. X Pull connector 3 and air hose 4 out of the housing. X Make sure that the pressure release screw on the pressure gauge is closed. X Remove the cap from the valve on the tyre. 285 Z 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 286 Practical advice Flat tyre X X Screw union nut 5 on air hose 4 onto the valve. X Insert plug 3 into the cigarette lighter socket* (Y page 181) or into a 12V socket in your vehicle (Y page 182). X X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. Lowering the vehicle X Press on/off switch 2 on the electric air pump to I. The electric air pump is switched on. The tyre is inflated. X X X Open the pressure release screw on the pressure gauge until the tyre pressure is correct. Disconnect the electric air pump and stow it away. Lower the vehicle. To do this, turn the crank of the jack anti-clockwise until the vehicle is standing firmly on the ground again. Place the jack to one side. When a tyre pressure of 3.5 bar has been reached, press 0 on the electric air pump switch. The electric air pump is switched off. X Turn the jack back to its initial position and store it and the rest of the vehicle tool kit in the boot. Vehicles with the "Minispare"/collapsible emergency spare wheel*: X X longer than six minutes without a break. Otherwise, it may overheat. The air pump can be operated again once it has cooled down. 1 – 5 Wheel bolts X 286 Have the tightening torque checked immediately after a wheel is changed. The wheels could work loose if they are not tightened to a tightening torque of 130 Nm. Wrap the faulty wheel in the protective film provided with the "Minispare"/collapsible emergency spare wheel* and transport the wheel in the boot. or ! Do not operate the electric air pump for If the tyre pressure is higher than 3.5 bar: G Risk of accident Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence indicated (1 to 5). The tightening torque must be 130 Nm. Depending on the size of the wheel, the faulty wheel may also be secured in the spare wheel recess. In this case, the stowage well casing will have to be removed from the spare wheel well and stowed in the boot. i Do not activate the tyre pressure monitor* until the deflated tyre has been removed from the vehicle. * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 287 Practical advice Flat tyre MOExtended run-flat system* The MOExtended run-flat system must only be used in conjunction with the tyre pressure loss warning system or the tyre pressure monitor*. ! The maximum permissible distance which can be driven in run-flat mode depends on the load in the vehicle. It is 50 km if the vehicle is partially laden and 30 km if fully laden. The maximum range that can be driven in emergency operation is measured from the point at which the pressure loss warning message appears in the multi-function display. You must not exceed a maximum speed of 80 km/h. i Vehicles featuring the MOExtended runflat system are not equipped with the TIREFIT kit*. It is therefore recommended to additionally equip your vehicle with the TIREFIT kit* when fitting tyres that do not feature runflat properties, e.g. winter tyres. i A TIREFIT kit* is available from any qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a MercedesBenz Service Centre. G Risk of accident The handling characteristics of your vehicle deteriorate in run-flat mode, for example: Rwhen cornering Rwhen braking Rwhen accelerating rapidly Adapt your driving style accordingly and avoid sudden changes in direction and sudden acceleration, as well as driving over obstacles (i.e. kerbs, potholes), and driving off-road. This is particularly the case when the vehicle is heavily laden. The maximum permissible distance that can be driven in run-flat mode depends to a large extent on the loads placed on the vehicle. It can be shorter due to high speeds, a heavy load, sudden acceleration and/or manoeuvring, the road surface condition, outside temperature, etc., or further if you drive carefully and conservatively. Do not continue to drive in run-flat mode if: Ryou hear banging noises Rthe * optional Ryou see smoke and smell rubber RESP® is intervening constantly Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tyre After driving in run-flat mode, you must have the rims checked for damage at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. The faulty tyre must be replaced in every case. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. i On a vehicle with MOExtended tyres, only MOExtended spare tyres should be used. These must be of the size specified for the vehicle. vehicle starts to shake 287 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 288 Practical advice Battery Battery Notes on the battery In order for the battery to achieve the maximum possible service life, it must always be sufficiently charged. Have the battery charge checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a lengthy period. To prevent damage from corrosion, only replace the battery with one that has a central ventilation cover. Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre if you wish to leave your vehicle parked up for a long period of time. Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary. Wear eye protection. Keep children away. G Risk of injury Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries. Risk of explosion Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. 288 Observe this Owner's Manual. H Environmental note Do not dispose of batteries with the household rubbish. Dispose of defective batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take them to a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or a special collection point for old batteries. G Risk of injury Mercedes-Benz recommends that, for safety reasons, you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering acid burns should the battery be damaged in the event of an accident. To prevent acid burns, observe the following safety notes when handling batteries: RDo not lean over batteries. RDo not place any metal objects on a battery. You could otherwise cause a short circuit and the battery's highly flammable gas mixture could ignite. RMake sure that you do not create electrostatic charge, e.g. by wearing synthetic clothing or as a result of friction on fabrics. You should not therefore pull or slide the battery over carpets or other synthetic materials. RNever touch the battery first. To discharge a possible electrostatic charge, 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 289 Practical advice Battery Electrostatic protection step out of the vehicle first and touch the bodywork. G Risk of injury RDo not wipe the battery using a cloth. The Only use rechargeable batteries with electrostatic protection fitted. The electrostatic protection prevents the creation of sparks due to electrostatic buildup, thereby preventing the highly explosive mixture of gases in the battery from igniting. battery may explode as a result of electrostatic charge or through the creation of sparks. ! Switch the engine off and remove the key before unscrewing or disconnecting the terminal clamps from the battery. You may otherwise destroy electronic components such as the alternator. Have the battery checked and, if necessary, replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, every two years or at least every 20,000 km. 1 Electrostatic protection 2 Battery i You can obtain the electrostatic protection from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X To remove: pull the electrostatic protection upwards and remove. X To fit: push the electrostatic protection firmly onto the battery. i Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have all work involving the battery, e.g. removing, charging and replacing, carried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. 1 Positive terminal (under cover) Installation location of the battery 2 Negative terminal Your vehicle is equipped with a battery in the boot. It is located under the cover in the spare wheel well. 289 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 290 Practical advice Battery Disconnecting the battery X Remove the battery cover. Charging and fitting the battery G Risk of accident X Remove the negative terminal clamp from the battery. G Risk of injury X Remove the cover from the positive terminal clamp. X Remove the positive terminal clamp from the battery. X Disconnect the breather hose. If the battery is disconnected: Rthere is no brake boosting effect and you will need to apply more pressure to brake and the brake pedal travel will be longer; you may have to depress the brake pedal with full force Ryou can no longer turn the key in the igni- tion and, on vehicles with KEYLESS GO*, pressing the KEYLESS GO button* on the selector lever will have no effect Rthe selector lever is locked in position P ! Always disconnect the battery in the sequence described below. Never swap the terminal clamps. You may otherwise damage the vehicle electronics. X Firmly depress the parking brake and move the selector lever to P. X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. X Open the boot/luggage compartment. X Remove the luggage well (Y page 218). 290 Removing the battery X Disconnect the battery (Y page 290). X Loosen the bolt which holds the battery in place. X Release the strap and remove the battery. Only charge the installed battery with a battery charger which has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. These battery chargers allow the battery to be charged while it is still installed. Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic system may be damaged. Only charge the battery in a well-ventilated area. As the battery is being charged, gases can escape and generate minor explosions. This may injure you and other persons or cause damage to the paintwork or acid corrosion on the vehicle. You can obtain information about battery chargers which allow the battery to be charged when still installed from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G Risk of injury There is a risk of acid burns during the charging process due to the gases which escape from the battery. Do not lean over the battery during the charging process. ! Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V. * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 291 Practical advice Jump-starting X X Charge the battery. Observe the notes in the operating instructions for your battery charger. ! Always reconnect the battery in the Refit the charged battery. To do this, follow the steps described in "Removing the battery" (Y page 290) in reverse order. X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Connect the positive terminal clamp and secure the cover. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from an external battery using jump leads. Observe the following points: RJump-starting must only be performed when the engine and catalytic converter are cold. X Connect the negative terminal clamp. RDo X Connect the breather hose. Make sure that a cell cap is fitted between the battery and the breather hose. RJump-starting ! Do not fit refillable batteries without electrostatic protection. The electrostatic discharge could otherwise cause the battery to explode. The battery acid released could cause damage to your vehicle. Further information on electrostatic protection (Y page 289). G Risk of injury Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Reconnecting the battery sequence described below. Never swap the terminal clamps. You may otherwise damage the vehicle electronics. X Refit the electrostatic protection if necessary (Y page 289). i If the battery power supply has been interrupted (e.g. if it has been reconnected), you must carry out the following tasks: RSet the time (Y page 125). RReset the sliding/tilting sunroof* (Y page 171). RReset the function for folding the exterior mirrors in/out automatically* by folding the mirrors out once (Y page 84). * optional Jump-starting not start the engine if the battery has frozen. Thaw the battery out first. may only be performed from 12V batteries. ROnly use jump leads which are protected against polarity reversal and which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. i Jump leads which are protected against polarity reversal and further information about jump-starting can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Never start the vehicle using a rapid battery charger. 291 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 292 Practical advice Jump-starting G Risk of injury There is a risk of acid burns when jumpstarting a vehicle due to the gases which escape from the battery. Do not lean over the battery while the engine is being jumpstarted. X Electrical consumers can be switched on again. Do not switch the lights on however, as this will overload the battery. X Remove the jump lead from the suitable earthing point 4 and negative terminal 3 first, then from the positive terminals 1 and 2, each time disconnecting from the battery on your own vehicle first. X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G Risk of explosion Gases escaping from the battery during jump-starting may cause minor explosions. Avoid creating sparks. Keep naked flames away from the battery, and do not smoke. Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries. You will find these under “Battery” in the index. X Make sure that the two vehicles do not touch. X Depress the parking brake. X Move the selector lever to P. X Switch off all electrical consumers. 292 1 Positive terminal of your vehicle's battery 2 Positive terminal of donor battery 3 Negative terminal of donor battery 4 Connection for suitable earth point on the vehicle X Connect positive contact on your vehicle 1 to positive terminal of the donor battery 2 using the jump lead, connecting the jump lead to your own battery first. X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed. X Connect the negative terminal of the donor battery 3 and the earth contact on your vehicle 4 using the jump lead, connecting the jump lead to the donor battery first. X Start the engine. 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 293 Practical advice Towing and tow-starting Towing and tow-starting Points to remember G Risk of accident If you tow the vehicle, you must use a rigid towing bar if: Rthe engine is not running Rthere is a brake system malfunction Rthe voltage supply or the vehicle's electrical system is damaged There is no power assistance for the steering when the engine is not running. G Risk of accident The vehicle is braked when HOLD is activated. Therefore, deactivate HOLD if the vehicle is to be towed. If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its weight must not exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle. It is better to have the vehicle transported than to have it towed. When towing, observe the legal requirements in all countries concerned. ! When towing, pull away slowly and without jerking. If the tractive power is too high, the vehicles could be damaged. Do not use the towing eye for recovery. ! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum of 50 km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded. With towing distances over 50 km, the entire vehicle needs to be lifted up and transported. ! Only secure the tow cable or towing bar to the towing eyes. You may otherwise damage the vehicle. RVehicles with an automatic transmission must not be tow-started. RIf the engine does not start, try jump-starting it (Y page 291). you are towing the vehicle over a considerable distance, this may only be done with the rear axle raised. RIf RThe ignition must be switched off if you are towing the vehicle with the front/rear axle ® raised. Intervention by ESP could otherwise damage the brake system. RBefore towing the vehicle, make sure that the battery is connected and charged. Otherwise: - You cannot switch on the ignition - You cannot move the selector lever to N - You have no support when braking i Switch off the automatic locking feature before the vehicle is towed (Y page 127). You could otherwise be locked out when pushing or towing the vehicle. RIf it is not possible to jump-start the vehicle, have it towed to the nearest qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. RIf the vehicle has suffered transmission damage, only tow it with the propeller shaft disconnected. RThe selector lever must be in position N on vehicles with automatic transmission. 293 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 294 Practical advice Towing and tow-starting Fitting the towing eye Opening the rear cover Towing the vehicle ! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum Opening the front cover of 50 km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded. With towing distances over 50 km, the entire vehicle needs to be lifted up and transported. The mountings for the removable towing eyes are located in the bumpers. They are located at the front and rear under the covers on the right-hand side of the vehicle when viewed in the direction of travel. ! The engine must be switched off (key in ignition lock in position 0 or position 1) if the vehicle is being towed with the rear axle raised or if the parking brake is being tested on a dynamometer. Intervention by ESP® could otherwise damage the brake system. 1 Cover X Push cover 1 back in the direction of the arrow. X Take cover 1 off the opening but do not remove it. 1 Cover Securing the towing eye X Push cover 1 back in the direction of the arrow. X Take the towing eye and the wheel wrench from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 217). X Take cover 1 off the opening but do not remove it. X Screw in the towing eye clockwise to the stop. X Insert the wheel wrench handle into the towing eye and tighten. 294 X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Move the selector lever to N. 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 295 Practical advice Fuses Removing the towing eye X Take the wheel wrench from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 217). X Insert the wheel wrench handle into the towing eye and turn it anti-clockwise. X Unscrew the towing eye. X X Replace the cover and press it until it engages. Return the towing eye and the wheel wrench to the vehicle tool kit. Transporting the vehicle The towing eyes can be used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter for transporting purposes. ! Only lash the vehicle down by the wheels or wheel rims, not by parts of the vehicle such as axle or steering components. The vehicle could otherwise be damaged. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Move the selector lever to N. Fuses Notes on changing fuses The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the components on the circuit and their functions will fail. i Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating (which can be recognised by the colour and amperage) and which have the amperage specified in the fuse allocation chart. A Mercedes-Benz Service Centre will be happy to advise you. G Risk of fire Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the correct amperage for the system concerned. Do not attempt to repair or bridge faulty fuses. A circuit overload could otherwise cause a fire. Have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ! Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the correct amperage for the system concerned. Otherwise, components or systems could be damaged. The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: RMain fuse box on the driver's side of the dashboard RFuse box in the boot, on the left-hand side of the vehicle Fuse allocation chart The fuse allocation chart is in the main fuse box in the dashboard. The fuse amperage is also indicated there. If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. 295 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 296 Practical advice Fuses Before changing a fuse X Park the vehicle. X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Remove the key from the ignition lock. X To open: open the driver’s door. X Insert a flat, blunt object into the recess as a lever 2. X Remove cover 1 from the dashboard using a flat, blunt object 2. X Pull cover 1 in the direction of the arrow by hand and remove it. X To close: clip in cover 1 at the front. X Fold cover 1 inwards until it engages. X Close the driver's door. Main fuse box The main fuse box is located on the driver's side of the dashboard. Fuse box in the boot The fuse box is located in the boot behind the trim on the left-hand side when viewed in the direction of travel. 1 Catches 2 Cover 1 Main fuse box cover 2 Flat, blunt object ! Do not use a pointed object, such as a screwdriver, to open the fuse box in the dashboard. You could otherwise damage the dashboard. 296 X To open: open the boot. X Turn both catches 1 anti-clockwise. X Remove cover 2. X To close: insert and engage cover 2. X Close the boot lid. 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 297 Technical data Introduction to technical data ......... Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... Vehicle electronics ........................... Vehicle identification plates ............ Engine ................................................ Performance ...................................... Tyres and wheels .............................. Vehicle dimensions .......................... Vehicle weights ................................. Service products and capacities ..... Frequencies for garage door openers* .................................................... 298 298 299 300 302 303 304 309 310 311 319 297 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 298 Technical data Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts Introduction to technical data i The technical data was determined in accordance with EU directives. All data applies to the vehicle's standard equipment. The data may therefore differ for vehicles with optional equipment. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts and conversion parts and accessories which have been specifically approved for your vehicle for their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is unable to evaluate other parts. MercedesBenz therefore accepts no responsibility for the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if they have been independently or officially approved. In Germany and some other countries, certain parts are only officially approved for installation or modification if they comply with legal requirements. All genuine Mercedes-Benz parts meet this requirement. The use of nonapproved parts may invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit. This is the case if: Rthey cause a change of the vehicle type from that for which the vehicle's general operating permit was granted Rother road users could be endangered Rthe emission or noise levels are adversely affected The use of non-approved parts could affect your vehicle's operating safety. MercedesBenz therefore recommends genuine 298 Mercedes-Benz parts and conversion parts and accessories that have been approved for your vehicle. H Environmental note Daimler also supplies reconditioned assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts and to which the same warranty applies. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts and approved conversion parts and accessories are available from Mercedes-Benz Service Centres. There, you can also receive advice about technical modifications and have the parts professionally fitted. Always quote the vehicle identification number and the engine number when ordering genuine parts. You will find these numbers on the vehicle data card in the Service Booklet or on your vehicle's identification plates (Y page 300). 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 299 Technical data Vehicle electronics Vehicle electronics Tampering with the engine electronics G Risk of accident Only have work on the engine electronics and related components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. MercedesBenz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The vehicle's roadworthiness could otherwise be affected. ! Only have work done on the engine electronics and its associated parts, such as control units, sensors and connector leads, carried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Otherwise, vehicle components may wear more quickly and the vehicle may lose its liability for material defects and its operating permit. Retrofitting electrical and electronic equipment Electrical and electronic equipment can jeopardise the operating safety of your vehicle. If equipment of this kind is retrofitted, it must be type-approved and bear the e mark. The e mark may be obtained from the equipment manufacturer or an authorised testing centre. ! Damage or consequential damage arising from fitting equipment not approved by Mercedes-Benz is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty. If you wish to install two-way radios in the vehicle, you must obtain formal approval. Mercedes-Benz approves the installation of two-way radios if such equipment is installed professionally and a low-reflection exterior aerial is used. The transmission output of the two-way radio must not exceed the maximum transmission outputs listed. G Risk of accident Two-way radios may interfere with the vehicle electronics and thereby jeopardise the operational safety of the vehicle and your own safety if: Rthey do not have an exterior aerial Rthe exterior aerial is not a low-reflection aerial Rthe exterior aerial has been fitted incorrectly G Risk of injury Excessive electromagnetic radiation may also cause damage to your health and the health of others. Using an exterior aerial takes into account current scientific discussions relating to the possible health hazards that may result from electromagnetic fields. For this reason, only have the exterior aerial fitted at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. i Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of an approved exterior aerial. This ensures optimal reception quality for mobile tele- 299 Z 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 300 Technical data Vehicle identification plates phones/wireless devices in the vehicle. This also ensures that interference between these devices and the vehicle's electronics is kept to a minimum. If installed, the exterior aerial conducts the electromagnetic fields transmitted by a mobile phone to the exterior of the vehicle. Vehicle identification plates Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN) and paint code number The vehicle identification plate is located at the bottom of the door frame on the frontpassenger side. Frequency range Maximum transmission output (watts) Short wave (< 50 MHz) 100 Vehicle identification plate (example) 1 Vehicle identification plate 4 m waveband 20 2 Vehicle manufacturer 3 EU type approval number 2 m waveband 50 70 cm waveband 35 25 cm waveband 10 ! If electrical or electronic equipment which does not fulfil these conditions is retrofitted, the vehicle's general operating permit may be invalidated (EU Directive 95/54/EC – the Automotive EMC Directive). 300 4 Vehicle identification number (VIN) 5 Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight 1 Vehicle identification plate 6 Maximum permissible front axle load 7 Maximum permissible rear axle load X 8 Paint code number Open the driver's door. You will see vehicle identification plate 1. 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 301 Technical data Vehicle identification plates Vehicle identification number (VIN) In addition to the information on the vehicle identification plate, the vehicle identification number (VIN) is also stamped onto the vehicle body. It is located on the floor in front of the front-passenger seat. Engine number The engine number is stamped on the engine block (crankcase). More information can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. 1 Floor covering 2 Vehicle identification number (VIN) X Slide the front-passenger seat to its rearmost position. X Fold floor covering 1 upwards. You will see vehicle identification number (VIN) 2. 301 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 302 Technical data Engine Engine Rated output At engine speed Rated torque At engine speed CLS 280 CLS 35032 170 kW (231 bhp) 200 kW (272 bhp) 6,000 rpm 6,000 rpm 6,400 rpm 300 Nm 350 Nm 2,500 – 5,000 rpm 2,400 – 5,000 rpm Number of cylinders CLS 63 AMG CLS 320 CDI 378 kW (514 bhp) 165 kW (224 bhp) 6,000 rpm 6,800 rpm 3,800 rpm 365 Nm 530 Nm 630 Nm 540 Nm 3,000 – 5,100 rpm 2,800 – 4,800 rpm 5,200 rpm 1,600 – 2,400 rpm CLS 350 CGI 32 CLS 500 215 kW (292 bhp) 285 kW (387 bhp) 6 6 6 8 8 6 Displacement 2,996 cm3 3,498 cm3 3,498 cm3 5,461 cm3 6,208 cm3 2,987 cm3 Maximum engine speed 6,500 rpm 6,500 rpm 6,750 rpm 6,500 rpm 7,200 rpm 4,500 rpm 32 Only 302 for certain countries. 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 303 Technical data Performance Performance Speeds CLS 28033 Maximum speed CLS 35034 CLS 350 CGI34 CLS 500 CLS 63 AMG CLS 320 CDI 250 km/h 250 km/h 250 km/h 250 km/h 246 km/h Acceleration from 0 to 100 km/h CLS 28035 Automatic transmission CLS 350 36 CLS 350 CGI36 CLS 500 CLS 63 AMG CLS 320 CDI 7.0 seconds 6.7 seconds 5.4 seconds 4.5 seconds 7.0 seconds 33 Missing values were not available at time of going to print. for certain countries. 35 Missing values were not available at time of going to print. 36 Only for certain countries. 34 Only 303 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 304 Technical data Tyres and wheels Tyres and wheels ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use tyres which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehicle. These tyres are specially adapted for use with the control systems, such as ABS or ESP®, and are marked as follows: RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original i Further information about tyres and wheels can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. You will find a table of tyre pressures on the inside of your vehicle's fuel filler flap . You will find further information about tyre pressures in the "Operation" section (Y page 200). RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended* (with run-flat characteristics) If you use other tyres, Mercedes-Benz cannot accept any responsibility for damage which may occur. Information about tyres can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ! If you fit tyres other than those tested and recommended by Mercedes-Benz, characteristics such as handling, noise levels and fuel consumption, etc. may be adversely affected. In addition, when driving with a load, dimensional variations and different tyre deformation characteristics could cause the tyres to make contact with the bodywork and axle components. This could result in damage to the tyres or the vehicle. 304 * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 305 Technical data Tyres and wheels Tyres Front axle Rear axle CLS 280 / CLS 35037 / CLS 350 CGI 37/ CLS 320 CDI CLS 350*37 / CLS 350 CGI*37 / CLS 320 CDI* / CLS 500 CLS 350*37 / CLS 350 CGI*37 / CLS 320 CDI* / CLS 500* Summer tyres 245/45 R17 95W 245/40 R18 93Y 245/40 R18 93Y Summer tyres38 245/45 R17 95Y MOExtended 245/40 R18 93Y MOExtended 245/40 R18 93Y MOExtended Winter tyres 245/45 R17 99V XL M+S 245/40 R18 97V XL M+S – Winter tyres38 245/45 R17 99V XL M +S MOExtended 245/40 R18 97V XL M+S MOExt. – Wheels 8.5J x 17 H2 ET 28 8.5J x 18 H2 ET 28 8.5J x 18 H2 ET 28 Summer tyres39 245/45 R17 95W 245/40 R18 93Y 275/35 R18 95Y Summer tyres38,39 245/45 R17 95Y MOExtended 245/40 R18 93Y MOExtended 275/35 R18 95Y MOExtended Winter tyres 245/45 R17 99V XL M+S 245/40 R18 97V XL M+S – Winter tyres38 245/45 R17 99V XL M +S MOExtended 245/40 R18 97V XL M+S MOExt. – Wheels 8.5J x 17 H2 ET 18 8.5J x 18 H2 ET 18 9.5J x 18 H2 ET 33 37 Only for certain countries. with run-flat characteristics, only in conjunction with an activated tyre pressure loss warning or tyre pressure monitor*. 39 Snow chains not permitted. 38 Tyres * optional 305 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 306 Technical data Tyres and wheels Front axle Rear axle Front axle Rear axle Both axles 40 Snow CLS 63 AMG CLS 63 AMG Performance Package Summer tyres 255/35 ZR19 96Y XL 255/35 ZR19 96Y XL Wheels 8.5J x 19 H2 ET 25 8.5J x 19 H2 ET 25 Summer tyres40 285/30 ZR19 98Y XL 285/30 ZR19 98Y XL Wheels 9.5J x 19 H2 ET 28 9.5J x 19 H2 ET 28 Winter tyres – 245/35 R19 93V XL M+S Wheels – 8.5J x 19 H2 ET 25 Winter tyres – 275/30 R19 96V XL M+S40 Wheels – 9.5J x 19 H2 ET 28 Winter tyres 245/40 R18 97V XL M+S 245/35 R19 93V XL M+S41, 42 Wheels 8.5J x 18 H2 ET 25 8.5J x 19 H2 ET 25 chains not permitted. snow chains have been approved, please consult your authorised Mercedes-Benz Centre. 42 Approved only for speeds up to a maximum of 220 km/h. 41 Special 306 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 307 Technical data Tyres and wheels AMG equipment* All models Front axle Rear axle 43 Use Summer tyres 255/35 ZR19 96Y XL Wheels 8.5J x 19 H2 ET 25 Summer tyres 285/30 ZR19 98Y XL43 Wheels 9.5J x 19 H2 ET 28 of snow chains not permitted. 307 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 308 Technical data Tyres and wheels Spare wheel* Your vehicle may be equipped with TIREFIT, a "Minispare"/collapsible emergency spare wheel* or a spare wheel* depending on the country, the engine and the wheels fitted. ! A tyre pressure of 3.5 bar/51 psi must be set for the collapsible emergency spare wheel*. A tyre pressure of 4.2 bar/61 psi must be set for the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel*. ! The maximum tyre pressure given in the table on the inside of the fuel filler flap must be set for the spare wheel*. "Minispare" emerTyres gency spare wheel* 44 Tyre pressure Wheels Collapsible emerTyres gency spare wheel* 44 Tyre pressure Wheels 44 Use 308 All models except CLS 63 AMG CLS 63 AMG CLS 63 AMG Performance Package T 155/70 R17 110M – – 4.2 bar – – 4.0B x 17 H2 ET 34 – – – 175/55 - 18 95P XL 175/50 - 19 97P – 3.5 bar 3.5 bar – 6.0B x 18H2 ET 25 6.5B x 19 H2 ET 14 of snow chains not possible. * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 309 Technical data Vehicle dimensions Vehicle dimensions CLS 280 CLS 35045 CLS 350 CGI45 CLS 500 CLS 63 AMG CLS 320 CDI Vehicle length (ECE) 4,917 mm 4,917 mm 4,917 mm 4,917 mm 4,915 mm 4,917 mm Vehicle width with exterior mirrors folded out 2,107 mm 2,107 mm 2,107 mm 2,107 mm 2,107 mm 2,107 mm Vehicle height 1,430 mm 1,430 mm 1,430 mm 1,415 mm 1,389 mm 1,430 mm Wheelbase 2,854 mm 2,854 mm 2,854 mm 2,854 mm 2,854 mm 2,854 mm 45 Only for certain countries. 309 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 310 Technical data Vehicle weights Vehicle weights The unladen weight includes the driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the maximum payload. CLS 280 CLS 35046 CLS 350 CGI46 CLS 500 CLS 63 AMG CLS 320 CDI Unladen weight (in accordance with EC directive) 1,730 kg 1,730 kg 1,735 kg 1,835 kg 1,905 kg 1,815 kg Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight 2,195 kg 2,195 kg 2,200 kg 2,300 kg 2,370 kg 2,280 kg Maximum permissible front axle load 1,050 kg 1,050 kg 1,055 kg 1,110 kg 1,165 kg 1,135 kg Maximum permissible rear axle load 1,190 kg 1,190 kg 1,190 kg 1,235 kg 1,250 kg 1,190 kg Maximum roof load 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg — 100 kg Maximum boot load 47 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg 46 Only 47 On for certain countries. vehicles with AIRMATIC, it is important not to exceed the maximum permissible rear axle load. 310 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 311 Technical data Service products and capacities Service products and capacities Notes on service products and capacities Service products are: Rfuels (e.g. petrol, diesel) Rlubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) Rcoolant Rbrake fluid Rwindscreen washer fluid Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use those products which have been tested and specially approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle and are listed in the MercedesBenz Owner's Manual in the relevant chapter since: Rparts and service products are matched Rdamage caused by the use of non-approved service products is not covered by the warranty You can recognise service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription on the containers: RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51) * optional Other designations or recommendations that relate to a level of quality or a specification in accordance with an MB Approval have not necessarily been approved by MercedesBenz. You can obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G Risk of injury When handling, storing and disposing of any service products, please observe the relevant regulations, as you could otherwise endanger yourself and others. Keep service products away from children. To protect your health, do not allow service products to come into contact with your eyes or open wounds. See a doctor immediately if any service product is swallowed. H Environmental note Dispose of service products in an environmentally-responsible manner. Fuels G Risk of explosion Fuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking are therefore prohibited when handling fuels. Before refuelling, turn off the engine and the auxiliary heating*. G Risk of injury Do not allow fuel to come into contact with skin or clothing. Allowing fuels to come into direct contact with your skin or inhaling fuel vapours is damaging to your health. Tank capacity Total capacity Of which reserve fuel On AMG vehicles 80 l Approx. 8 – 9 l Approx. 14 l ! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine. Never mix diesel with petrol. Even small amounts of 311 Z 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 312 Technical data Service products and capacities the wrong fuel result in damage to the injection system. Damage resulting from adding the wrong fuel is not covered by the warranty. More information about refuelling and fuels can be found in the "Operation" section. Introduction to fuel consumption The vehicle will use more fuel than usual in the following situations: Rat very low temperatures Refficient Rin urban traffic Rdriving Ron Rin short trips mountainous terrain ! Do not use any special additives, as they can cause malfunctions and engine damage. Damage resulting from the use of such additives is not covered by the MercedesBenz warranty. H Environmental note CO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which scientists believe to be principally responsible for global warming (the greenhouse effect). Your vehicle's CO2 emissions are directly related to fuel consumption and therefore depend on: 312 use of the fuel by the engine style Rother non-technical factors, such as envi- ronmental influences or road conditions You can minimise your vehicle's CO2 emissions by driving carefully and having it serviced regularly. 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 313 Technical data Service products and capacities Fuel consumption The information does not refer to a specific vehicle, but serves as a means of comparing the different vehicle types. CLS 28048 CLS 35049 CLS 350 CGI49 CLS 500 CLS 63 AMG48 CLS 320 CDI Urban 13.8 - 14.1 l/ 100 km 14.3 – 15.1 l/100 km 13.0 – 13.2 l/100 km 17.0 – 17.2 l/100 km 22.6 l/100 km 10.6 – 11.0 l/100 km Extraurban 7.4 - 7.7 l/ 100 km 7.8 – 8.0 l/100 km 7.0 – 7.2 l/100 km 8.5 – 8.7 l/100 km 9.9 l/100 km 5.9 – 6.4 l/100 km Overall (NEDC) 9.8 - 10.0 l/ 100 km 10.1 – 10.6 l/100 km 9.1 – 9.3 l/100 km 11.6 – 11.8 l/100 km 14.5 l/100 km 7.6 – 8.1 l/100 km 233 - 237 g/km 241 – 253 g/km 217 – 222 g/km 275 – 280 g/km 345 g/km 200 – 215 g/km CO2 emissions 48 Missing 49 Only values were not available at time of going to print. for certain countries. 313 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 314 Technical data Service products and capacities Engine oil A list of engine oils tested and approved in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products is available from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Approval by Mercedes-Benz is also often indicated by the MB Sheet number on the oil container. The table shows which MB Sheet number applies to which engine: CLS 280 CLS 35050 CLS 350 CGI50 CLS 500 CLS 63 AMG CLS 320 CDI 229.3/229.5 229.3/229.5 229.3/229.5 229.551 – MB Sheet number (vehicles without a diesel particle filter)52 – – – – 228.3/228.5/ 228.51 229.3/229.31/ 229.5/229.51 MB Sheet number (vehicles with a diesel particle filter) – – – – 228.51/229.31/ 229.51 MB Sheet number i In the event that the: 50 Only for certain countries. only SAE XW-40 engine oils may be used. 52 Only for certain countries. 51 Restriction: 314 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 315 Technical data Service products and capacities Rengine RSAE oil brand (MB Sheet number) Mixing oils reduces the benefits of highgrade engine oil. classification (viscosity) ! Do not use lubricant additives, since they Rgrade is not available, you can use another mineral or synthetic engine oil which has been approved by Mercedes-Benz. lead to increased wear and damage to the mechanical assemblies. The use of lubri- cant additives will result in a restriction of your warranty. ! Engine oils for vehicles without a diesel particle filter may also be used temporarily in vehicles with a diesel particle filter if the engine oil listed is not available. You must then have an oil change carried out as soon as possible. Capacities The following values refer to an oil change including the oil filter. Engine with oil filter CLS 280 CLS 35053 CLS 350 CGI53 CLS 500 CLS 320 CDI CLS 63 AMG Replacement amount 8.0 l 8.0 l 8.5 l 8.8 l 53 Only for certain countries. 315 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 316 Technical data Service products and capacities Coolant The coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the following tasks: Ranti-corrosion protection Rantifreeze Rraising protection the boiling point i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is topped up with a coolant that will ensure adequate antifreeze and corrosion protection. ! Only top up with coolant that has been premixed with the desired quantity of antifreeze protection. You could otherwise damage the engine. There is more information about coolant and topping it up on Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products Sheet 310.1. ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even in countries where high temperatures prevail. Otherwise, the cooling system will not be sufficiently protected from corrosion, and the boiling point will be too low. 316 If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present in the correct concentration, the boiling point of the coolant will be around 130 °C. The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the cooling system should: Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the cooling system against freezing down to around – 37 °C. Rnot exceed 55% concentration (antifreeze protection down to –45 °C), otherwise heat will not be effectively dissipated. If the vehicle has lost coolant, top it up with equal amounts of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. Mercedes-Benz recommends using an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor which has been approved for MercedesBenz. ! The cooling system contains a lifetime supply which must be renewed after 15 years, or after 250, 000 km at the latest. Have the renewal confirmed in the Service Booklet. The warranty is only valid if you top up with an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor which has been approved by Mercedes-Benz. 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 317 Technical data Service products and capacities Capacities The following values indicate the total cooling system capacities. CLS 280 CLS 35054 CLS 350 CGI54 CLS 500 CLS 63 AMG CLS 320 CDI 10.0 l 10.0 l 12.0 l 11.3 l 11.8 l 12.6 l Coolant Amount of antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor required for antifreeze protection Down to –37 ° C (approximately 50%) 5.0 l 5.0 l 6.0 l 5.7 l 5.9 l 6.3 l Down to –45 ° C (approximately 55%) 5.5 l 5.5 l 6.6 l 6.2 l 6.5 l 6.9 l Brake fluid Over a period of time, the brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air; this lowers its boiling point. G Risk of accident If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low, vapour pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard (e.g. when driving downhill). This would impair braking efficiency. Have the brake fluid renewed every two years with a brake fluid that has been approved by Mercedes-Benz and have this confirmed in the Service Booklet. i There is usually a notice in the engine compartment to remind you when the next brake fluid change is due. Windscreen washer system The washer fluid reservoir holds approximately 4.5 litres; on vehicles with the headlamp cleaning system* it holds 7 litres. The headlamp cleaning system* and the windscreen washer system are both supplied from the washer fluid reservoir. X At temperatures above freezing point: Z 54 Only for certain countries. * optional 317 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, Technical data Service products and capacities Top up the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and windscreen washer concentrate (Y page 197). X At temperatures below freezing point: Top up the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water, antifreeze and windscreen washer concentrate (Y page 197). Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside temperatures. G Risk of fire Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when windscreen washer concentrate is being handled. 318 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 318 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 319 Technical data Frequencies for garage door openers* Frequencies for garage door openers* Country Radio registration number Frequency range MHz Egypt W-KLE-17 / 08 March 06 27, 30, 40, 418, 433, 868 Andorra 20 July 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 Australia 28 June 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 Barbados Registration not required 27, 40, 433, 868 Belgium Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Chile 38447/F-23 No.3.3634 40, 433 Denmark Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE20 April 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Germany Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE7519301 29 April 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Estonia Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE11 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Finland Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 13 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 France Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 13 May 05 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 French Guyana Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 13 May 05 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 Gibraltar Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE13 May 05 (UK) 27, 40, 418, 433, 868 Greece Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE11409/18/4/2005 18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 * optional 319 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 320 Technical data Frequencies for garage door openers* Country Radio registration number Frequency range MHz United Kingdom Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 418, 433, 868 Guadeloupe Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 13 May 05 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 Ireland Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Iceland Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Italy DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/15347 DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/15348 DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/15350 DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/15357 DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/15358 DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/15359 27, 40, 433, 868 Jordan TRC/LPD/2005/23 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 Canary Islands 000438/2005, 000439/2005 000440/2005, 000441/2005 000445/2005, 000446/2005 000447/2005, 3 June 2005 27, 40, 433 Croatia SDR 224/06 27, 40, 433, 868 Kuwait 5 October 2005 27, 30, 40, 418, 433, 868 Latvia 2920/O&M/2006 / 26 April 06 27, 40, 433, 868 320 * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 321 Technical data Frequencies for garage door openers* Country Radio registration number Frequency range MHz Lebanon Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 27.4-1B-1609 6 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Liechtenstein Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 14357 27 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Lithuania Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE27.4-1B-1609 6 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Luxembourg Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE150405/9538 24 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Malta Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Martinique Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE11 July 05 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 Monaco Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 13 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 New Zealand 20 March 06 27, 30, 40, 433 The Netherlands Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Norway Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE05/02424-SA644 18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Austria Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Poland Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE21 April 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Portugal ANCOM-S08399/05 27, 40, 433, 868 Reunion Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE11 July 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Russia 13 May 05 433 Z * optional 321 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 322 Technical data Frequencies for garage door openers* Country Radio registration number Frequency range MHz Saudi Arabia 11_02_05/5024-5-6 418, 433 Sweden Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Switzerland Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE14357 27 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Slovakia Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE Slovak 206/11/2005 4 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Slovenia Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 500-1/2005-437 9 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Spain 000438/2005, 000439/2005, 000440/2005 000441/2005, 000445/2005, 000446/2005 000447/2005 27, 40, 433, 868 South Africa 11 October 2005 27, 40, 433 Syria 279/4/14 / 05 March 06 Czech Republic General Licence GL-30/R/2000 Reg No. 844 13 May 05 27, 40, 433 Hungary Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 United Arab Emirates 1623/5/10-2/26/76 433 Cyprus Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE5 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 322 * optional 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 323 323 219_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB mkalafa, 324 2007-11-13T09:28:36+01:00 - Seite 324